TWI809132B - Manufacturing method of semiconductor chip and manufacturing method of semiconductor device - Google Patents

Manufacturing method of semiconductor chip and manufacturing method of semiconductor device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI809132B
TWI809132B TW108121952A TW108121952A TWI809132B TW I809132 B TWI809132 B TW I809132B TW 108121952 A TW108121952 A TW 108121952A TW 108121952 A TW108121952 A TW 108121952A TW I809132 B TWI809132 B TW I809132B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
semiconductor wafer
modified layer
mentioned
modified
layer
Prior art date
Application number
TW108121952A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW202017020A (en
Inventor
佐藤陽輔
岩屋渉
田中佑耶
Original Assignee
日商琳得科股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商琳得科股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商琳得科股份有限公司
Publication of TW202017020A publication Critical patent/TW202017020A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI809132B publication Critical patent/TWI809132B/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/50Working by transmitting the laser beam through or within the workpiece
    • B23K26/53Working by transmitting the laser beam through or within the workpiece for modifying or reforming the material inside the workpiece, e.g. for producing break initiation cracks

Abstract

A manufacturing method of a semiconductor chip of the present embodiment obtains a semiconductor chip by forming a first modified layer in a first region from a circuit-forming surface of a semiconductor wafer to a depth of 215 µm in the semiconductor wafer by irradiating the semiconductor wafer with a laser beam from the back side of the semiconductor wafer; forming a second modified layer in a second region from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer to a depth of 215 µm in the semiconductor wafer and an area closer to the back surface side than the first modified layer by irradiating the semiconductor wafer with a laser beam from the back surface side of the semiconductor wafer; grinding the back surface of the semiconductor wafer; and dividing the semiconductor wafer in areas in the first modified layer and the second modified layer by applying a force to the semiconductor wafer while grinding.

Description

半導體晶片的製造方法及半導體裝置的製造方法Method for manufacturing semiconductor wafer and method for manufacturing semiconductor device

本發明,係有關於半導體晶片的製造方法及半導體裝置的製造方法。 本申請案,在2018年6月29日,根據日本申請的專利申請第2018-124158號主張優先權,在此引用其內容。The present invention relates to a method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer and a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device. This application claims priority based on Patent Application No. 2018-124158 filed in Japan on June 29, 2018, the contents of which are cited here.

分割半導體晶圓製造半導體晶片時,廣泛應用所謂刀片切割,係使用切割刀片,切斷半導體晶圓。 另一方面,作為刀片切割以外的半導體晶圓的分割方法,例如,眾所周知利用雷射光照射的以下方法(參照專利文獻1〜2)。Dividing Semiconductor Wafers When manufacturing semiconductor wafers, so-called blade dicing is widely used, which uses dicing blades to cut semiconductor wafers. On the other hand, as methods for dividing semiconductor wafers other than blade dicing, for example, the following methods using laser light irradiation are known (see Patent Documents 1 to 2).

此方法中,首先,聚焦於半導體晶圓內部中設定的焦點,照射雷射光,半導體晶圓內部形成改質層。此改質層,透過從外部施力,在半導體晶圓內部,因為往半導體晶圓的兩面方向發生龜裂,成為半導體晶圓的分割(切斷)的起點。其次,對於半導體晶圓施力,在上述改質層的部位分割半導體晶圓,得到半導體晶片。半導體晶圓,通常,研磨與其電路形成面相反側的面(背面)加以薄化,但伴隨此時的研磨,有時利用對半導體晶圓施加的力,分割半導體晶圓。伴隨這樣的改質層形成的半導體晶圓的分割方法,稱作stealth dicing(隱形切割)(註冊商標),雖然透過對半導體晶圓照射雷射光,磨除照射部位的半導體晶圓,但與從其表面切斷半導體晶圓下去的雷射切割,本質上完全不同。In this method, first, laser light is irradiated with a focus on a set focal point inside the semiconductor wafer, and a modified layer is formed inside the semiconductor wafer. This modified layer is applied as a starting point for splitting (cutting) of the semiconductor wafer because cracks are generated in the direction of both surfaces of the semiconductor wafer inside the semiconductor wafer due to external force. Next, a force is applied to the semiconductor wafer, and the semiconductor wafer is divided at the portion of the modified layer to obtain a semiconductor wafer. A semiconductor wafer is generally thinned by polishing the surface (back surface) opposite to the circuit-formed surface, but the semiconductor wafer may be divided by a force applied to the semiconductor wafer during the polishing. The division method of the semiconductor wafer accompanying the formation of such a modified layer is called stealth dicing (registered trademark). Although the semiconductor wafer is irradiated with laser light to remove the semiconductor wafer at the irradiated part, it is different from the Laser dicing, which cuts off the surface of the semiconductor wafer, is fundamentally different.

這樣伴隨改質層形成的半導體晶片的製造方法,與利用上述刀片切割、雷射切割的方法不同,因為不伴隨半導體晶圓的磨除,在得到更多半導體晶片方面是有利的。 [先行技術文獻] [專利文獻]Such a method of manufacturing semiconductor wafers with the formation of modified layers is different from the above-mentioned methods of dicing with blades and laser dicing, because it does not involve grinding of semiconductor wafers, and is advantageous in terms of obtaining more semiconductor wafers. [Prior Art Literature] [Patent Document]

[專利文獻1]日本國專利第4402708號公報 [專利文獻2]日本國專利第2016-76522號公開公報[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent No. 4402708 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-76522

[發明所欲解決的課題][Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

但是,以專利文獻1〜2中記載的方法為首,伴隨改質層形成的習知半導體晶片的製造方法,具有不適於尺寸小的半導體晶片製造的問題點。這樣的製造方法中,通常,為了有效率地分割半導體晶圓,半導體晶圓內部中,不是背面側而是電路形成側的區域中,沿著電路形成面,線狀形成改質層。However, conventional semiconductor wafer manufacturing methods involving the formation of modified layers, including the methods described in Patent Documents 1 to 2, have a problem that they are not suitable for manufacturing small-sized semiconductor wafers. In such a manufacturing method, generally, in order to divide the semiconductor wafer efficiently, the modifying layer is formed linearly along the circuit formation surface in a region not on the back side but on the circuit formation side inside the semiconductor wafer.

第1圖,係概要顯示形成這樣的改質層之半導體晶圓立體圖。在此所示的半導體晶圓9,其內部中,在電路形成面9a側的區域,形成線狀改質層91。改質層91,對於半導體晶圓9的電路形成面9a,平行或大致平行,沿著電路形成面9a形成。又,在此,為了方便起見, 1條線狀概要顯示改質層91,但實際上,往半導體晶圓9的厚度方向,有擴大。又,在此,限於顯示往同方向延伸的6條改質層91, 通常改質層的條數比這多,還有對圖示方向直交的方向上也形成多數。換言之,第1圖,顯示未結束目標條數的改質層形成而在中途階段的狀態。另一方面,半導體晶圓9內部中,在背面9b側的區域,不形成改質層。Fig. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a semiconductor wafer on which such a modified layer is formed. In the semiconductor wafer 9 shown here, a linear modifying layer 91 is formed in a region on the side of the circuit formation surface 9 a inside the semiconductor wafer 9 . The modified layer 91 is formed parallel or substantially parallel to the circuit formation surface 9 a of the semiconductor wafer 9 and is formed along the circuit formation surface 9 a. Here, for the sake of convenience, the modified layer 91 is schematically shown as a single line, but actually, it expands in the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer 9 . Here, only six reforming layers 91 extending in the same direction are shown, but usually the number of reforming layers is more than this, and many are also formed in a direction perpendicular to the illustrated direction. In other words, FIG. 1 shows a state in which the formation of the target number of modified layers has not been completed and is in the middle. On the other hand, within the semiconductor wafer 9 , no modified layer is formed in the region on the back surface 9 b side.

改質層91中,實際上,與改質層91以外的部位不同,存在細微龜裂。因此,改質層91,只有此龜裂部分,比改質層91以外的部位凸出,體積稍微增大,密度下降。因此,改質層91的形成後,半導體晶圓9內部中,存在改質層91的電路形成面9a側區域,比不存在改質層91的背面9b側區域,體積增大,此體積增大的影響,改質層的線條數越多越大。此時,在半導體晶圓9的厚度方向,半導體晶圓9的體積中,產生不能忽視的程度的差異。為了得到尺寸小的半導體晶片,因為半導體晶圓中形成的改質層的線條數增大,正好形成這樣的狀態。於是,半導體晶圓,以電路形成面9a為凸面(換言之,背面9b為凹面)彎曲。這樣的彎曲,當意圖製造一邊長在2mm(毫米)以下的半導體晶片時,特別容易發生。 第2圖,概要顯示這樣的放大剖面圖,由於改質層的形成,產生彎曲狀態的半導體晶圓。In the reformed layer 91 , actually, unlike the portions other than the reformed layer 91 , fine cracks exist. Therefore, only the cracked part of the modified layer 91 protrudes from the parts other than the modified layer 91, slightly increases in volume, and decreases in density. Therefore, after the modified layer 91 is formed, in the semiconductor wafer 9, the region on the circuit forming surface 9a side where the modified layer 91 exists has a larger volume than the region on the back surface 9b side where the modified layer 91 does not exist. The larger the effect, the larger the number of lines in the modified layer. At this time, in the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer 9 , there is a non-negligible difference in the volume of the semiconductor wafer 9 . In order to obtain a small-sized semiconductor wafer, such a state is just formed because the number of lines of the modified layer formed on the semiconductor wafer increases. Then, the semiconductor wafer is curved such that the circuit formation surface 9a is a convex surface (in other words, the back surface 9b is a concave surface). Such warping is particularly likely to occur when it is intended to manufacture a semiconductor wafer with a side length of 2 mm or less. Fig. 2 schematically shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of a semiconductor wafer in a curved state due to the formation of a modified layer.

半導體晶圓像這樣彎曲時,步驟上發生不良。例如,發生彎曲的半導體晶圓,變得搬送困難。又,如上述,研磨形成改質層後的半導體晶圓背面時,密合此半導體晶圓背面至專用工作台,吸附固定至此工作台,但發生彎曲的半導體晶圓,不能與工作台密合,因為不能固定至工作台,不能研磨其背面。When a semiconductor wafer is bent in this way, defects in steps occur. For example, a warped semiconductor wafer becomes difficult to transport. Also, as mentioned above, when grinding the back surface of the semiconductor wafer after the modified layer is formed, the back surface of the semiconductor wafer is tightly bonded to a special workbench, and is adsorbed and fixed to the workbench, but the curved semiconductor wafer cannot be tightly bonded to the workbench. , because it cannot be fixed to the table, its backside cannot be ground.

本發明的目的在於提供半導體晶片的製造方法,經由形成半導體晶圓內部中的改質層,即使製造尺寸小的半導體晶片時,也可以抑制半導體晶圓發生彎曲。 [用以解決課題的手段]An object of the present invention is to provide a semiconductor wafer manufacturing method capable of suppressing warping of the semiconductor wafer even when a small-sized semiconductor wafer is manufactured by forming a modified layer inside the semiconductor wafer. [Means to solve the problem]

本發明,提供半導體晶片的製造方法,具有第1改質步驟,透過從半導體晶圓的背面側對上述半導體晶圓照射雷射光,在上述半導體晶圓的內部中,從上述半導體晶圓的電路形成面到215μm(微米)深度的第1區域中,形成第1改質層;第2改質步驟,透過從上述背面側對上述半導體晶圓照射雷射光,上述半導體晶圓的內部之中,從上述背面到215μm(微米)深度的第2區域中,而且比上述第1改質層更上述背面側之處,形成第2改質層;以及分割步驟,實行上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟後,研磨上述半導體晶圓的上述背面的同時,伴隨此研磨,由於對上述半導體晶圓施加的力,在上述第1改質層及上述第2改質層的部位,透過分割上述半導體晶圓,得到半導體晶片。The present invention provides a method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer, comprising a first modifying step of irradiating the semiconductor wafer with laser light from the back side of the semiconductor wafer, and in the interior of the semiconductor wafer, from the circuit of the semiconductor wafer In the first region from the formation surface to a depth of 215 μm (micrometer), a first modification layer is formed; in the second modification step, laser light is irradiated to the semiconductor wafer from the back side, and in the interior of the semiconductor wafer, In the second region from the above-mentioned back surface to a depth of 215 μm (micrometer), and on the side of the above-mentioned back surface than the above-mentioned first modified layer, a second modified layer is formed; 2. After the reforming step, while polishing the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, along with the polishing, due to the force applied to the semiconductor wafer, the parts of the first modified layer and the second modified layer are transmitted through the divided The above-mentioned semiconductor wafer is obtained as a semiconductor wafer.

本發明的半導體晶片的製造方法中,對於進行上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的上述半體晶圓厚度,使上述半導體晶片的最短的一邊長相等以上也可以。 又,本發明,提供半導體裝置的製造方法,根據上述半導體晶片的製造方法,得到複數個半導體晶片排列狀態的晶片群後,包括積層步驟,使用包括支撐片以及上述支撐片上形成的膜狀接合劑之黏晶片,將上述黏晶片中的上述膜狀接合劑,透過黏貼至上述半導體晶片群中的半導體晶片研磨後的上述背面,製作上述半導體晶片群與上述黏晶片的積層物;以及拾起步驟,對於上述積層物,透過從其支撐片側施力,將上述積層物中的上述膜狀接合劑,沿著上述半導體晶片切斷,從上述支撐片拉開並拾起背面備置切斷後的上述膜狀接合劑之上述半導體晶片。 [發明效果]In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer according to the present invention, the thickness of the half wafer when performing the first reforming step and the second reforming step may be equal to or greater than the length of the shortest side of the semiconductor wafer. In addition, the present invention provides a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device. According to the above-mentioned method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer, after obtaining a wafer group in which a plurality of semiconductor wafers are arranged, a stacking step is included, using a support sheet and a film-like bonding agent formed on the support sheet. For the bonded chip, the above-mentioned film-like bonding agent in the above-mentioned bonded chip is pasted to the above-mentioned back surface of the semiconductor chip in the above-mentioned semiconductor chip group after grinding, and a laminate of the above-mentioned semiconductor chip group and the above-mentioned bonded chip is produced; and the step of picking up , for the above-mentioned laminate, by applying force from the support sheet side, the above-mentioned film-like adhesive in the above-mentioned laminate is cut along the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer, pulled away from the above-mentioned support sheet, and the back side is picked up to prepare the cut-off above-mentioned film The above-mentioned semiconductor wafer in the form of bonding agent. [Invention effect]

根據應用本發明的半導體晶片的製造方法,經由形成半導體晶圓內部中的改質層,即使製造尺寸小的半導體晶片時,也可以抑制半導體晶圓發生彎曲。According to the method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer to which the present invention is applied, by forming the reforming layer inside the semiconductor wafer, even when a small-sized semiconductor wafer is manufactured, it is possible to suppress warping of the semiconductor wafer.

>>半導體晶片的製造方法>> 根據本發明的一實施形態的半導體晶片的製造方法,具有第1改質步驟,透過從半導體晶圓的背面側對上述半導體晶圓照射雷射光,在上述半導體晶圓的內部中,從上述半導體晶圓的電路形成面到215μm(微米)深度的第1區域中,形成第1改質層;第2改質步驟,透過從上述背面側對上述半導體晶圓照射雷射光,上述半導體晶圓的內部之中,從上述背面到215μm(微米)深度的第2區域中,而且比上述第1改質層更上述背面側之處,形成第2改質層;以及分割步驟,實行上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟後,研磨上述半導體晶圓的上述背面的同時,伴隨此研磨,由於對上述半導體晶圓施加的力,在上述第1改質層及上述第2改質層的部分,透過分割上述半導體晶圓,得到半導體晶片。>>Manufacturing method of semiconductor wafer>> According to a method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer according to an embodiment of the present invention, there is a first modifying step of irradiating the semiconductor wafer with laser light from the back side of the semiconductor wafer, in the inside of the semiconductor wafer, from the semiconductor In the first region where the circuit formation surface of the wafer reaches a depth of 215 μm (micrometers), a first modification layer is formed; in the second modification step, the semiconductor wafer is irradiated with laser light from the back side, and the surface of the semiconductor wafer is In the inside, in the second region from the back surface to a depth of 215 μm (micrometer), and on the back side of the first modified layer, a second modified layer is formed; and in the dividing step, the first modified layer is implemented. After the reforming step and the second reforming step, while grinding the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, along with this grinding, due to the force applied to the semiconductor wafer, the surface of the first reforming layer and the second reforming layer Part, by dividing the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer, obtains the semiconductor wafer.

根據本實施形態的半導體晶片的製造方法,經由形成半導體晶圓內部中的改質層,即使製造尺寸小的半導體晶片(換言之,應用stealth dicing(隱形切割)(註冊商標))時,由於半導體晶圓內部形成第1改質層及第2改質層,也可以抑制半導體晶圓發生彎曲。因此,分割成半導體晶片前已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓,可以輕易搬送,又,研磨其背面時,密合至專用工作台,因為可以確實固定,也可以研磨其背面。 又,本實施形態的製造方法,不只是尺寸小的半導體晶片,也適用於尺寸中程度或大的半導體晶片的製造。According to the semiconductor wafer manufacturing method of the present embodiment, even when a small-sized semiconductor wafer is manufactured (in other words, when stealth dicing (registered trademark) is applied) by forming the modified layer inside the semiconductor wafer, the Forming the first modifying layer and the second modifying layer inside the circle can also suppress the bending of the semiconductor wafer. Therefore, the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer have been formed before being divided into semiconductor wafers can be easily transported, and when the back surface is ground, it can be firmly fixed to the dedicated table because it can be firmly fixed. Grind its back. In addition, the manufacturing method of this embodiment is applicable not only to small-sized semiconductor wafers but also to the manufacture of medium-sized or large-sized semiconductor wafers.

伴隨第1改質層及第2改質層等改質層形成的半導體晶片的製造方法,與利用上述刀片切割或雷射切割的方法不同,因為不伴隨半導體晶圓的磨除,在得到更多半導體晶片方面是有利的。 又,刀片切割的話,因為半導體晶圓與切割刀片的接觸處一邊使水(有時稱作「切割水」)流動一邊進行切割,特別在尺寸小的半導體晶片的製造時,半導體晶片與水的接觸時間變長,可能對半導體晶片的特性帶來不好的影響。相對於此,伴隨上述改質層形成的半導體晶片的製造方法,在可以抑制這樣的不良方面是有利的。The manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer accompanied by the formation of modified layers such as the first modified layer and the second modified layer is different from the method of using the above-mentioned blade dicing or laser dicing, because it is not accompanied by grinding of the semiconductor wafer. The aspect of multiple semiconductor wafers is advantageous. In addition, in the case of blade dicing, because the contact between the semiconductor wafer and the dicing blade is cut while water (sometimes referred to as "cutting water") flows, especially in the manufacture of small semiconductor wafers, the distance between the semiconductor wafer and water The longer contact time may adversely affect the characteristics of the semiconductor wafer. On the other hand, the method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer accompanying the formation of the modified layer described above is advantageous in that such defects can be suppressed.

本實施形態的製造方法中,目標半導體晶片的一邊長,理想是2mm(毫米)以下,例如1.5mm以下,以及0.9mm以下其中任一都可以。一邊長在上述上限值以下,經由半導體晶圓內部中的改質層形成而製造尺寸小的半導體晶片時,抑制半導體晶圓彎曲的效果變更高。In the manufacturing method of this embodiment, the side length of the target semiconductor wafer is preferably 2 mm or less, for example, 1.5 mm or less, or 0.9 mm or less. When the side length is below the upper limit, the effect of suppressing warping of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher when a small-sized semiconductor wafer is produced by forming a modified layer inside the semiconductor wafer.

本實施形態的製造方法中,目標半導體晶片的一邊長的下限值,不特別限定。在半導體晶片的製造更容易方面,上述長度理想是0.5mm以上。In the manufacturing method of this embodiment, the lower limit of the side length of the target semiconductor wafer is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of easier manufacture of the semiconductor wafer, the above-mentioned length is preferably 0.5 mm or more.

但是,本實施形態中,對於進行後述的第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓厚度,理想是形成半導體晶片最短的一邊長在相等以上( [半導體晶片最短的一邊長]≧[進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓厚度])。藉此,經由半導體晶圓內部中的改質層形成,即使製造尺寸小的半導體晶片時,抑制半導體晶圓彎曲的效果也變更高。However, in this embodiment, for the thickness of the semiconductor wafer when performing the first reforming step and the second reforming step described later, it is desirable to form the shortest side length of the semiconductor wafer equal to or more ([the shortest side length of the semiconductor wafer] ≧[thickness of the semiconductor wafer when performing the first modifying step and the second modifying step]). Thereby, through the formation of the modified layer inside the semiconductor wafer, even when a small-sized semiconductor wafer is manufactured, the effect of suppressing the bending of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher.

本說明書中,「半導體晶片最短的一邊」,在構成半導體晶片外周的複數邊中,意味長度最短的邊。例如,像平面形狀是正方形的半導體晶片,構成半導體晶片外周之長度最短的邊存在複數時,「半導體晶片最短的一邊」意味這些最短的邊。In this specification, "the shortest side of the semiconductor wafer" means the side with the shortest length among the plurality of sides constituting the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer. For example, when there are plural shortest sides constituting the outer periphery of a semiconductor wafer having a square planar shape, the "shortest side of the semiconductor wafer" means these shortest sides.

以下,一邊參照圖面,一邊每步驟詳細說明關於本實施形態的半導體晶片的製造方法。又,本說明書中的說明使用的圖,全部為了容易了解發明特徵,方便起見,有時放大顯示主要部分,各構成要素的尺寸比率等不一定與實際相同。Hereinafter, the method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer according to the present embodiment will be described in detail step by step while referring to the drawings. In addition, all the drawings used in the description in this specification may show main parts in enlarged scale for the sake of easy understanding of the features of the invention, and the dimensional ratio of each component may not necessarily be the same as the actual one.

>第1實施形態> 第3圖,係用以概略說明本發明第1實施形態的半導體晶片的製造方法中上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之放大剖面圖,係對應第5圖的立體圖。 又,第4圖之後的圖中,對於與已說明的圖中所示相同的構成要素,附上與其已說明的圖的狀況相同的符號,省略其詳細說明。>First Embodiment> Fig. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically illustrating the first modifying step and the second modifying step in the method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and corresponds to the perspective view of Fig. 5 . In addition, in the drawings after FIG. 4 , the same symbols as those shown in the already described drawings are attached to the same components as those shown in the already described drawings, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[第1實施形態中的第1改質步驟] 第1實施形態中的上述第1改質步驟,如第3(a)圖及第5(a)圖所示,透過從半導體晶圓8的背面(即,與電路形成面8a相反側的面)8b側對半導體晶圓8照射雷射光R1 ,半導體晶圓8的內部中,從半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a到215μm(微米)深度的第1區域80a中,形成第1改質層81。 第3圖中,符號D1 ,表示第1區域80a的深度,在本實施形態中係215μm(D1 =215μm)。第1區域80a,在半導體晶圓8的內部中,係電路形成面8a與半導體晶圓8厚度T8 方向中離電路形成面8a只有D1 的距離處之間的區域。[The first modifying step in the first embodiment] In the above-mentioned first modifying step in the first embodiment, as shown in Fig. 3(a) and Fig. 5(a), the The back surface (that is, the surface opposite to the circuit formation surface 8a) 8b side irradiates the semiconductor wafer 8 with laser light R 1 , and in the inside of the semiconductor wafer 8, from the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8 to 215 μm (micrometer) In the deep first region 80a, the first modified layer 81 is formed. In Fig. 3, symbol D 1 indicates the depth of the first region 80a, which is 215 μm in this embodiment (D 1 =215 μm). The first region 80a, inside the semiconductor wafer 8, is the region between the circuit formation surface 8a and the distance D1 from the circuit formation surface 8a in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8.

進行第1改質步驟時的半導體晶圓8厚度T8 ,不特別限定,但理想是725〜775μm。這樣的厚度T8 的半導體晶圓8,使用性及剛性更優異。The thickness T 8 of the semiconductor wafer 8 when the first modifying step is performed is not particularly limited, but is preferably 725 to 775 μm. The semiconductor wafer 8 having such a thickness T8 is more excellent in usability and rigidity.

提供第1改質步驟的半導體晶圓8,進行用以調節其厚度的研磨,及不進行都可以。尤其,不進行研磨的半導體晶圓8,因為沒有可以成為其破損原因的研磨痕,使用性更優異,是理想的。The semiconductor wafer 8 provided in the first modifying step may or may not be subjected to polishing for adjusting its thickness. In particular, the non-polished semiconductor wafer 8 is ideal because it has no grinding marks that may cause damage, and is more excellent in usability.

又,第1實施形態中,進行第1改質步驟與後述的第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓8厚度T8 ,對於目標半導體晶片最短的一邊長,理想在相等以下。由於滿足這樣條件,經由半導體晶圓內部中的改質層形成,即使製造尺寸小的半導體晶片時,抑制半導體晶圓彎曲的效果也變更高。Also, in the first embodiment, the thickness T 8 of the semiconductor wafer 8 when performing the first modifying step and the second modifying step described later is desirably equal to or less than the shortest side length of the target semiconductor wafer. Since such a condition is satisfied, the effect of suppressing warpage of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher even when a small-sized semiconductor wafer is produced via the reformed layer formation inside the semiconductor wafer.

第1實施形態中,半導體晶圓8,在其電路形成面8a上理想是設置保護膜7。保護膜7,覆蓋電路形成面8a,保護電路形成面8a的同時,在後述的分割步驟中,是用以保持複數個半導體晶片排列狀態的半導體晶片群的膜。保護膜7可以是眾所周知的膜,例如,舉出已知的Backglide tape(膠帶)。In the first embodiment, the semiconductor wafer 8 is preferably provided with the protective film 7 on the circuit formation surface 8a. The protective film 7 covers the circuit formation surface 8a, protects the circuit formation surface 8a, and is a film for maintaining the semiconductor wafer group in which a plurality of semiconductor wafers are arranged in a division step described later. The protective film 7 may be a well-known film, for example, known Backglide tape (adhesive tape).

第1改質步驟中,第1改質層81,在後述的分割步驟中,為了得到目標尺寸的半導體晶片,第1區域80a中,沿著電路形成面8a形成線狀。線狀的第1改質層81,對電路形成面8a,平行或大致平行。第5圖中,概略以1條線狀顯示第1改質層81。In the first reforming step, the first reforming layer 81 is formed in a linear shape along the circuit formation surface 8a in the first region 80a in order to obtain a semiconductor wafer having a target size in a dividing step described later. The linear first modifying layer 81 is parallel or substantially parallel to the circuit formation surface 8a. In FIG. 5 , the first modified layer 81 is roughly shown as a single line.

形成線狀的第1改質層81時,首先,為了聚焦於第1區域80a中的起點處,更具體而言,半導體晶圓8的周緣部近旁處設定的焦點,從半導體晶圓8的背面8b側照射雷射光R1 。藉此,首先局部形成第1改質層81。又,往第5圖中的箭頭M1 方向,一邊錯開雷射光R1 的照射位置,一邊重複進行此操作,最後形成線狀的第1改質層81。When forming the linear first modified layer 81, first, in order to focus on the starting point in the first region 80a, more specifically, the focus set near the peripheral portion of the semiconductor wafer 8, from the semiconductor wafer 8 The back surface 8b side is irradiated with laser light R 1 . In this way, the first modified layer 81 is first partially formed. Further, this operation is repeated while shifting the irradiation position of the laser light R1 in the direction of the arrow M1 in FIG. 5 , and finally the linear first modified layer 81 is formed.

半導體晶圓8厚度T8 方向中,第1改質層81的擴大寬度(換言之,第1改質層81的高度),不特別限定,但理想是10〜50μm,更理想是20〜40μm。上述擴大寬度,例如可以根據雷射光R1 的照射條件調節。In the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 , the enlarged width of the first modified layer 81 (in other words, the height of the first modified layer 81) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 50 μm, more preferably 20 to 40 μm. The aforementioned expansion width can be adjusted according to the irradiation conditions of the laser light R1 , for example.

第1實施形態中,半導體晶圓8厚度T8 方向中,第1改質層81的形成位置,只要不事先聲明,將以同方向中在第1改質層81的中央位置表示。In the first embodiment, the formation position of the first modified layer 81 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 is shown as the central position of the first modified layer 81 in the same direction unless otherwise stated.

第1實施形態中,半導體晶圓8內部的第1區域80a中,只要至少存在一部分1條線狀的第1改質層81地形成第1改質層81即可,但理想是存在1條線狀的第1改質層81全部地形成第1改質層81。In the first embodiment, in the first region 80a inside the semiconductor wafer 8, it is only necessary to form the first modified layer 81 so that at least a part of the linear first modified layer 81 exists. The linear first modified layer 81 entirely forms the first modified layer 81 .

第1實施形態中,如上述,半導體晶圓8內部中,從半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a到215μm(微米)深度的位置,形成第1改質層81。由於第1改質層81的形成位置滿足這樣的條件,且後述第2改質層82的形成位置也滿足後述的條件,得到上述半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果的同時,後述的分割步驟中,也可以良好分割半導體晶圓。更顯著得到這樣的效果方面,在半導體晶圓8的內部中,從半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a到理想是195μm,更理想是175μm,又更理想是155μm的深度為止的位置,形成第1改質層81也可以。In the first embodiment, as described above, the first modifying layer 81 is formed inside the semiconductor wafer 8 at a depth of 215 μm (micrometer) from the circuit formation surface 8 a of the semiconductor wafer 8 . Since the formation position of the first modified layer 81 satisfies such conditions, and the formation position of the second modified layer 82 described later also satisfies the conditions described later, while the above-mentioned effect of suppressing the curvature of the semiconductor wafer is obtained, in the division step described later, Semiconductor wafers can also be divided well. In order to obtain such an effect more remarkably, in the inside of the semiconductor wafer 8, from the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8 to the position where the depth is preferably 195 μm, more preferably 175 μm, and more preferably 155 μm, a second layer is formed. 1 Modified layer 81 is also acceptable.

另一方面,第1實施形態中,半導體晶圓8的內部中,形成第1改質層81的位置,離電路形成面8a的深度的最小值,不特別限定,例如考慮目標半導體晶片厚度等,只要適當選擇即可。 考慮通用的半導體晶片厚度等的話,在半導體晶圓8內部中,從半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a,到理想是比65μm,更理想是比75μm,更深的位置,形成第1改質層81也可以。On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the position where the first modified layer 81 is formed inside the semiconductor wafer 8, and the minimum value of the depth from the circuit formation surface 8a are not particularly limited, for example, considering the target semiconductor wafer thickness, etc. , as long as it is properly selected. In consideration of the thickness of a general-purpose semiconductor wafer, etc., the first modified layer is formed in the semiconductor wafer 8 from the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8 to a position deeper than 65 μm, more preferably 75 μm. 81 is also available.

第1實施形態中,第1改質層81的形成位置,在任意組合設定上述理想的下限值及上限值的範圍內,可以適當調節。例如,一實施形態中,第1改質層81的形成位置,從半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a到理想是65〜215μm,更理想是65〜195μm,又更理想是65〜175μm,又再更理想是65〜155μm深度的區域中任一位置都可以。但是,這些是第1改質層81形成位置的一例。In the first embodiment, the formation position of the first modified layer 81 can be appropriately adjusted within the range in which the aforementioned ideal lower limit and upper limit are set in any combination. For example, in one embodiment, the formation position of the first modified layer 81 is preferably 65 to 215 μm from the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8, more preferably 65 to 195 μm, and more preferably 65 to 175 μm. Even more ideally, any position in the region with a depth of 65 to 155 μm is fine. However, these are examples of the positions where the first modified layer 81 is formed.

線狀的第1改質層81,直線狀及非直線狀都可以,只要考慮目標半導體晶片的形狀適當選擇即可,但通常理想是直線狀。The linear first modifying layer 81 may be linear or non-linear, and may be appropriately selected in consideration of the shape of the target semiconductor wafer, but it is usually preferably linear.

線狀的第1改質層81,外觀上,可以形成連續線狀,但根據雷射光R1 的照射條件,有時成為非連續的(換言之,斷續的)點線狀。第1實施形態中,線狀的第1改質層81,只要全體形狀是線狀的話,這些實線狀及點線狀都可以。The linear first modified layer 81 may be formed in a continuous linear shape in appearance, but may be discontinuous (in other words, intermittent) dotted linear shape depending on the irradiation conditions of the laser light R1 . In the first embodiment, the linear first modified layer 81 may have a solid line shape or a dotted line shape as long as the overall shape is linear.

雷射光R1 的波長,只要1050nm(毫微米)以上的話,不特別限定,考慮實用性的話,理想是1050〜1500 nm,例如,1342nm也可以。雷射光R1 ,其波長是1050 nm以上的話,不被半導體晶圓的材料之矽吸收,適於第1改質層81的形成。The wavelength of the laser light R1 is not particularly limited as long as it is more than 1050nm (nanometer), but it is ideally 1050 to 1500 nm in consideration of practicality, for example, 1342nm is also possible. Laser light R 1 having a wavelength of 1050 nm or more is not absorbed by silicon, which is a material of the semiconductor wafer, and is suitable for forming the first modified layer 81 .

[第1實施形態中的第2改質步驟] 形成線狀的第1改質層81後,第1實施形態中的上述第2改質步驟中,如第3(b)及5(b)圖所示,透過從上述背面8b側對半導體晶圓8照射雷射光R2 ,在半導體晶圓8的內部中,從背面8b到215μm深度為止的第2區域80b中且比第1改質層81更上述背面側8b之處,形成第2改質層82。 第3圖中,符號D2 表示第2區域80b的深度,第1實施例中,215μm(D2 =215μm)。第2區域80b,係半導體晶圓8的內部中,背面8b與半導體晶圓8厚度T8 方向中離背面8b只有D2 的距離處之間的區域。[Second modification step in the first embodiment] After forming the linear first modification layer 81, in the second modification step in the first embodiment, as in steps 3(b) and 5(b) As shown in the figure, when the semiconductor wafer 8 is irradiated with laser light R2 from the back surface 8b side, in the inside of the semiconductor wafer 8, in the second region 80b from the back surface 8b to a depth of 215 μm and lower than the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 are formed on the above-mentioned rear side 8b. In Fig. 3, symbol D 2 represents the depth of the second region 80b, which is 215 μm in the first embodiment (D 2 =215 μm). The second region 80b is the region between the back surface 8b and the distance of D2 from the back surface 8b in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 in the interior of the semiconductor wafer 8 .

第2改質層82,除了在半導體晶圓8中的形成處不同之外,可以利用與第1改質層81的情況相同的方法形成。 更具體地,第2改質步驟中,第2改質層82,在後述的分割步驟中,為了得到目標尺寸的半導體晶片,第2區域80b中,沿著背面8b形成線狀。線狀的第2改質層82,對於背面8b,形成平行或大致平行。第5圖中,概略以1條線狀顯示第2改質層82。The second modified layer 82 can be formed by the same method as that of the first modified layer 81 except that the location in the semiconductor wafer 8 is different. More specifically, in the second reforming step, the second reforming layer 82 is formed in a linear shape along the back surface 8b in the second region 80b in order to obtain a semiconductor wafer having a target size in a dividing step described later. The linear second modifying layer 82 is formed parallel or substantially parallel to the back surface 8b. In FIG. 5 , the second modified layer 82 is roughly shown as a single line.

形成線狀的第2改質層82時,首先為了聚焦在第2區域80b中的起點處,更具體而言,半導體晶圓8的周緣部近旁處設定的焦點,也從半導體晶圓8的背面8b側照射雷射光R2 。藉此,首先局部形成第2改質層82。又,往第5圖中的箭頭M2 方向,一邊錯開雷射光R2 的照射位置,一邊重複進行此操作,最後形成線狀的第2改質層82。When forming the linear second modified layer 82, first, in order to focus on the starting point in the second region 80b, more specifically, the focus set near the peripheral portion of the semiconductor wafer 8, also from the semiconductor wafer 8 The back surface 8b side is irradiated with laser light R 2 . Thereby, first, the second modified layer 82 is partially formed. Further, this operation is repeated while shifting the irradiation position of the laser light R2 in the direction of the arrow M2 in FIG. 5, and finally the linear second modified layer 82 is formed.

半導體晶圓8厚度T8 方向中的第2改質層82的擴大寬度(換言之,第2改質層82的高度),不特別限定,與上述第1改質層81擴大寬度相同數值範圍也可以。第2改質層82的上述擴大寬度,可以利用與第1改質層81在上述擴大寬度時同樣的方法調節。The expanded width (in other words, the height of the second modified layer 82) of the second modified layer 82 in the thickness T of the semiconductor wafer 8 in the direction is not particularly limited, and the same numerical range as the expanded width of the first modified layer 81 is also used. Can. The above-mentioned enlarged width of the second modified layer 82 can be adjusted by the same method as that of the above-mentioned enlarged width of the first modified layer 81 .

第1實施形態中,半導體晶圓8厚度T8 方向中,第2改質層82的形成位置,只要不特別聲明,以同方向中第2改質層82的中央位置表示。In the first embodiment, the formation position of the second modified layer 82 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 is represented by the central position of the second modified layer 82 in the same direction unless otherwise specified.

第1實施形態中,半導體晶圓8內部的第2區域80b中,只要至少存在一部分1條線狀的第2改質層82地形成第2改質層82即可,但理想是存在全部1條線狀的第2改質層82地形成第2改質層82。In the first embodiment, in the second region 80b inside the semiconductor wafer 8, it is only necessary to form the second modified layer 82 so that at least a part of the linear second modified layer 82 exists. The second modified layer 82 is formed as a striped second modified layer 82 .

第1實施形態中,如上述,半導體晶圓8內部中,從半導體晶圓8的背面8b到215μm(微米)深度的位置,形成第2改質層82。由於第2改質層82的形成位置滿足這樣的條件,且第1改質層81的形成位置也滿足上述條件,得到上述半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果的同時,後述的分割步驟中,也可以良好分割半導體晶圓。更顯著得到這樣的效果方面,在半導體晶圓8的內部中,從半導體晶圓8的背面8b到理想是195μm,更理想是175μm,又更理想是155μm深度為止的位置,形成第2改質層82也可以。In the first embodiment, as described above, the second modified layer 82 is formed in the semiconductor wafer 8 from the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 to a depth of 215 μm (micrometer). Since the formation position of the second modified layer 82 satisfies such conditions, and the formation position of the first modified layer 81 also satisfies the above-mentioned conditions, while obtaining the above-mentioned suppression effect of semiconductor wafer bending, in the dividing step described later, it is also possible to Good separation of semiconductor wafers. In order to obtain such an effect more remarkably, in the inside of the semiconductor wafer 8, form the second modification at a position from the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 to a depth of preferably 195 μm, more preferably 175 μm, and more preferably 155 μm. Layer 82 is also possible.

另一方面,第1實施形態中,半導體晶圓8的內部中,形成第2改質層82的位置,離背面8b的深度的最小值,不特別限定,例如考慮目標半導體晶片厚度等,只要適當選擇即可。 考慮通用的半導體晶片厚度等的話,在半導體晶圓8內部中,離半導體晶圓8的背面8b,理想是比65μm,更理想是比70μm更深的位置上,形成第2改質層82也可以。On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the minimum value of the depth from the rear surface 8b at the position where the second modified layer 82 is formed inside the semiconductor wafer 8 is not particularly limited. Just choose appropriately. In consideration of the thickness of a general-purpose semiconductor wafer, etc., the second modified layer 82 may be formed at a position deeper than 65 μm, more preferably 70 μm, from the back surface 8 b of the semiconductor wafer 8 inside the semiconductor wafer 8 .

第1實施形態中,第2改質層82的形成位置,在任意組合設定上述理想的下限值及上限值的範圍內,可以適當調節。例如,一實施形態中,第2改質層82的形成位置,從半導體晶圓8的背面8b到理想是65〜215μm,更理想是65〜195μm,又更理想是65〜175μm,又再更理想是65〜155μm深度的區域中任一位置都可以。但是,這些是第2改質層82形成位置的一例。In the first embodiment, the formation position of the second modified layer 82 can be appropriately adjusted within the range in which the aforementioned ideal lower limit and upper limit are set in any combination. For example, in one embodiment, the formation position of the second modified layer 82 is preferably 65 to 215 μm from the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, more preferably 65 to 195 μm, and more preferably 65 to 175 μm, and furthermore. Ideally, any position in the region with a depth of 65 to 155 μm is fine. However, these are examples of the positions where the second modified layer 82 is formed.

線狀的第2改質層82的形狀,與上述線狀的第1改質層81的形狀相同也可以。The shape of the linear second modified layer 82 may be the same as the shape of the aforementioned linear first modified layer 81 .

雷射光R2 的波長,由於與雷射光R1 的情況相同的理由,與雷射光R1 的波長相同。於是,理想是使雷射光R2 的波長與雷射光R1 的波長一致。The wavelength of the laser light R2 is the same as the wavelength of the laser light R1 for the same reason as in the case of the laser light R1 . Therefore, it is desirable to make the wavelength of the laser light R2 coincide with the wavelength of the laser light R1 .

第1改質層81與第2改質層82之間的距離Δ12 ,只要不損害本發明的效果,不特別限定,但理想是275〜615μm,更理想是405〜605μm。由於上述Δ12 在這樣的範圍,半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果變更高。 上述Δ12 ,意味在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中第1改質層81的上端與第2改質層82的下端之間的距離。The distance Δ12 between the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 is not particularly limited as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired, but is preferably 275 to 615 μm, more preferably 405 to 605 μm. Since the above-mentioned Δ12 is in such a range, the effect of suppressing warpage of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher. The aforementioned Δ 12 means the distance between the upper end of the first modified layer 81 and the lower end of the second modified layer 82 in the thickness T 8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 .

線狀第2改質層82,對於線狀第1改質層81,理想是平行的。換言之,第5圖中的箭頭M2 的方向,理想是與箭頭M1 的方向平行。藉此,半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果變更高,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度分割半導體晶圓。The linear second modified layer 82 is ideally parallel to the linear first modified layer 81 . In other words, the direction of the arrow M2 in FIG. 5 is ideally parallel to the direction of the arrow M1 . Thereby, the effect of suppressing bowing of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

又,如上述,2個方向平行時,本實施形態中,形成線狀第2改質層82的方向,與形成線狀第1改質層81的方向(即,箭頭M1 的方向)相同也可以,相反也可以。但是,如後述,雷射光R2 的光源,兼雷射光R1 的光源時,如第2圖所示,上述方向理想是相反(即,箭頭M2 的方向)。在此情況下,形成線狀第1改質層81後,不使光源返回至原來的位置,可以立即進行第2改質步驟,可以縮短第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟需要的時間。Also, as described above, when the two directions are parallel, in this embodiment, the direction in which the linear second modified layer 82 is formed is the same as the direction in which the linear first modified layer 81 is formed (that is, the direction of arrow M1 ). It is also possible, and vice versa. However, as will be described later, when the light source of the laser light R2 is also the light source of the laser light R1 , as shown in FIG. 2, the above-mentioned directions are ideally opposite (ie, the direction of the arrow M2 ). In this case, after the linear first modifying layer 81 is formed, the second modifying step can be performed immediately without returning the light source to the original position, and the time required for the first modifying step and the second modifying step can be shortened. .

第2改質步驟,在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,理想是在第1改質層81的正上方形成第2改質層82。藉此,半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果變更高,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。 本說明書中,「半導體晶圓的厚度方向中,第1改質層的正上方形成第2改質層」,意味「半導體晶圓的厚度方向中,第2改質層位置比第1改質層位置更半導體晶圓的背面側,且對半導體晶圓的表面平行的方向(換言之,對半導體晶圓的厚度方向直交的方向)中,使第2改質層位置與第1改質層位置相同,形成第2改質層」。In the second modifying step, it is desirable to form the second modified layer 82 directly above the first modified layer 81 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 . Thereby, the effect of suppressing bowing of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later. In this specification, "the second modified layer is formed directly above the first modified layer in the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer" means "the position of the second modified layer is higher than that of the first modified layer in the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer." The position of the layer is on the back side of the semiconductor wafer, and in a direction parallel to the surface of the semiconductor wafer (in other words, a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer), the position of the second modified layer is the same as the position of the first modified layer. Similarly, the second modified layer is formed".

線狀第2改質層82在長邊方向的長度,理想是線狀第1改質層81的長邊方向長度的90〜110%,100%的話(換言之,與線狀第1改質層81的長邊方向長度相同)更理想。藉此,半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果變更高,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。The length of the linear second modified layer 82 in the longitudinal direction is ideally 90 to 110% of the length of the linear first modified layer 81 in the longitudinal direction. 81 have the same length in the long side direction) is more ideal. Thereby, the effect of suppressing bowing of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

對半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a或背面8b平行的方向中,線狀第2改質層82的一端部位置,與線狀第1改質層81的一端部位置一致也可以,不一致也可以,但理想是一致。透過這些位置一致,半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果變更高,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。線狀第2改質層82的另一端部位置與線狀第1改質層81的另一端部位置的關係也與上述一端部的情況相同。In a direction parallel to the circuit-forming surface 8a or the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the position of one end of the linear second modified layer 82 may coincide with the position of one end of the linear first modified layer 81, or may not coincide. Yes, but the ideal is to be consistent. By aligning these positions, the effect of suppressing bowing of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later. The relationship between the position of the other end of the linear second modified layer 82 and the position of the other end of the linear first modified layer 81 is also the same as that of the one end described above.

第1實施形態中,如上述,形成離雷射光R1 的光源遠的第1改質層81後,由於形成離雷射光R2 的光源近的第2改質層82,不伴隨步驟異常,可以形成第1改質層81及第2改質層82。形成第2改質層82後,因為此第2改質層82妨礙雷射光R1 的透過,形成第1改質層81是困難的。In the first embodiment, as described above, after forming the first modified layer 81 far away from the light source of the laser light R1 , the formation of the second modified layer 82 close to the light source of the laser light R2 is not accompanied by abnormal steps, The first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 can be formed. After forming the second modified layer 82, it is difficult to form the first modified layer 81 because the second modified layer 82 hinders the transmission of the laser light R1 .

作為雷射光R2 的光源,使用雷射光R1 的光源也可以(雷射光R2 的光源,兼雷射光R1 的光源也可以)。As the light source of the laser light R2 , the light source of the laser light R1 can also be used (the light source of the laser light R2 can also be used as the light source of the laser light R1 ).

第1實施形態中,像這樣,上述剖面中,在連結半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a及背面8b的方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層的數量都是1。本說明書中,「連結半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a及背面8b的方向」,與半導體晶圓8厚度T8 的方向一致也可以,不一致也可以。於是,半導體晶圓8厚度T8 的方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層的數量理想都是1。In the first embodiment, in the above cross-section, in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface 8a and the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the number of linear first modified layers and second modified layers formed in a row is the same. it's 1. In this specification, the "direction connecting the circuit formation surface 8a and the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8" may or may not coincide with the direction of the thickness T8 of the semiconductor wafer 8. Therefore, in the direction of the thickness T8 of the semiconductor wafer 8 , the number of linear first modified layers and second modified layers formed in a row is ideally one.

第1實施形態中,像這樣,在對半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a或背面8b平行的一方向中,一邊錯開位置,一邊遍及半導體晶圓8全區重複進行線狀第1改質層81及第2改質層82的形成(即,重複進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟),藉此,如第3(c)及5(c)圖所示,分別形成複數條線狀第1改質層81及第2改質層82。 這樣重複形成的線狀第1改質層81及第2改質層82,都只要以目前為止說明的線狀第1改質層81及第2改質層82的情況相同的方法形成即可。 又,第5(c)圖中,為了方便起見,只不過顯示各6條線狀第1改質層81及第2改質層82,但這些改質層,考慮製作的半導體晶片尺寸,形成比這些多的條數。In the first embodiment, in a direction parallel to the circuit formation surface 8a or the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the linear first modifying layer is repeatedly applied over the entire area of the semiconductor wafer 8 while shifting its position. 81 and the formation of the second modifying layer 82 (that is, repeating the first modifying step and the second modifying step), whereby, as shown in Figures 3(c) and 5(c), a plurality of strips are respectively formed. Linear first modified layer 81 and second modified layer 82 . The linear first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 formed repeatedly in this way may be formed by the same method as the linear first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 described so far. . Also, in Figure 5(c), for the sake of convenience, only six linear first modified layers 81 and second modified layers 82 are shown, but these modified layers, considering the size of the manufactured semiconductor wafer, A number of lines more than these are formed.

此時,全部線狀第1改質層81,理想是形成互相平行。同樣地,全部線狀第2改質層82,理想是形成互相平行。At this time, all the linear first modifying layers 81 are preferably formed parallel to each other. Likewise, all the linear second modifying layers 82 are ideally formed parallel to each other.

第1實施形態中,像這樣,沿著半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a,第1區域80a中形成多數的線狀第1改質層81,沿著半導體晶圓8的背面8b,第2區域80b中形成多數的線狀第2改質層82。結果,得到半導體晶圓8,在第1區域80a中具有1層配置多數的(複數條)線狀第1改質層81的層,在第2區域80b中具有1層配置多數的(複數條)線狀第2改質層82的層。In the first embodiment, like this, along the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8, a large number of linear first modified layers 81 are formed in the first region 80a, and along the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the second Many linear second modifying layers 82 are formed in the region 80b. As a result, a semiconductor wafer 8 is obtained, which has a single-layer arrangement of a plurality of (plural) linear first modifying layers 81 in the first region 80a, and has a single-layer arrangement of a plurality of (plural) linear first modifying layers 81 in the second region 80b. ) layer of the linear second modifying layer 82 .

第1實施形態中,又,如第3(d)及5(d)圖所示,利用與上述第1改質層81的情況相同的方法在第1區域80a中另外形成多數與上述第1改質層81交叉的線狀第1改質層83,利用與上述第2改質層82的情況相同的方法在第2區域80b中另外形成多數與上述第2改質層82交叉的線狀第2改質層84。此時,與形成第1改質層81及第2改質層82的情況相同,形成第1改質層83後,形成第2改質層84。In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 3(d) and 5(d), a plurality of layers similar to the above-mentioned first modified layer 81 are additionally formed in the first region 80a by the same method as that of the above-mentioned first modified layer 81. The linear first modified layer 83 intersecting the modified layer 81 is additionally formed in the second region 80b by the same method as in the case of the second modified layer 82 described above. The second modified layer 84 . At this time, as in the case of forming the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 , after the first modified layer 83 is formed, the second modified layer 84 is formed.

又,第5(d)圖中,為了方便起見,只不過顯示各6條線狀第1改質層83及第2改質層84,但這些改質層,考慮製作的半導體晶片尺寸,形成比這些多的條數。 又,第3(d)圖,在半導體晶圓8的剖面中,顯示第1改質層83及第2改質層84都重疊的情況,但根據半導體晶圓8的剖面位置,此剖面中,有時第1改質層83及第2改質層84不重疊。Also, in Figure 5(d), for the sake of convenience, only six linear first modified layers 83 and second modified layers 84 are shown, but these modified layers, considering the size of the semiconductor wafer to be produced, A number of lines more than these are formed. In addition, Fig. 3(d) shows a situation where both the first modified layer 83 and the second modified layer 84 overlap in the cross section of the semiconductor wafer 8, but according to the cross section position of the semiconductor wafer 8, in this cross section , sometimes the first modified layer 83 and the second modified layer 84 do not overlap.

線狀第1改質層83與線狀第1改質層81的交叉角度,只要根據目標半導體晶片的形狀適當調節即可。線狀第1改質層83及線狀第1改質層81都是直線狀時,這些交叉角度通常理想是90°(即,線狀第1改質層83與線狀第1改質層81直交)。 線狀第2改質層84及線狀第2改質層82的交叉角度,可以設定與上 述相同。 又,2條直線狀的線交叉時,存在這些線的「交叉角度」比0°大且不足180°的2個角度,但這些角度互不同時,本說明書中所謂「交叉角度」,意味這些之中較小的角度。The intersecting angle between the linear first modified layer 83 and the linear first modified layer 81 may be appropriately adjusted according to the shape of the target semiconductor wafer. When both the linear first modified layer 83 and the linear first modified layer 81 are linear, these intersecting angles are generally ideally 90° (that is, the linear first modified layer 83 and the linear first modified layer 81 orthogonal). The intersection angle between the linear second modified layer 84 and the linear second modified layer 82 can be set in the same manner as above. Also, when two linear lines intersect, there are two angles in which the "intersection angle" of these lines is greater than 0° and less than 180°. However, when these angles are different from each other, the term "intersection angle" in this specification means these the smaller angle.

半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,第1改質層83的擴大寬度(換言之,第1改質層83的高度),不特別限定,可以與上述第1改質層81的擴大寬度相同的數值範圍,理想是與第1改質層81的擴大寬度相同程度的值。本說明書中,所謂比較對象的2個值是「同程度的值」,意味「相同值或不是相同值,雖有小誤差,引起的影響可以忽視程度地輕微」。 第1改質層83的上述擴大寬度,可以利用與第1改質層81的上述擴大寬度時相同的方法調節。In the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8, the enlarged width of the first modified layer 83 (in other words, the height of the first modified layer 83) is not particularly limited, and may be the same as the enlarged width of the first modified layer 81 described above. The numerical range of is ideally a value approximately the same as the enlarged width of the first modified layer 81 . In this specification, the two values to be compared are "values of the same degree", which means "the same value or not, although there is a small error, the influence caused is negligibly slight". The aforementioned enlarged width of the first modified layer 83 can be adjusted by the same method as that of the aforementioned enlarged width of the first modified layer 81 .

第2改質層84的情況也相同。 即,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,第2改質層84的擴大寬度(換言之,第2改質層84的高度),不特別限定,與上述第2改質層82的擴大寬度相同的數值範圍也可以,理想是與上述第2改質層82的擴大寬度同程度的值。 第2改質層82的上述擴大寬度,可以利用與第1改質層81的上述擴大寬度的情況相同的方法調節。The same applies to the second modified layer 84 . That is, in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8, the enlarged width of the second modified layer 84 (in other words, the height of the second modified layer 84) is not particularly limited, and it is the same as the enlarged width of the second modified layer 82 described above. The same numerical range is also possible, and it is preferably a value on the same level as the enlarged width of the second reforming layer 82 described above. The aforementioned enlarged width of the second modified layer 82 can be adjusted by the same method as that of the aforementioned enlarged width of the first modified layer 81 .

線狀第1改質層81之間的間隔、線狀第1改質層83之間的間隔、線狀第2改質層82之間的間隔以及線狀第2改質層84之間的間隔,都只要根據目標半導體晶片的尺寸適當調節即可。本說明書中,所謂「線狀第1改質層81之間的間隔」,意味「相鄰的線狀第1改質層81在各個端部間的最短距離」,例如「線狀第1改質層83之間的間隔」等,同種的改質層之間的間隔的情況也相同。 但是,第1實施形態中,如同之前說明,對於進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓8厚度T8 ,理想是設定這些改質層之間的間隔,使半導體晶片的最短一邊的長度在相等以上。The distance between the linear first modified layers 81, the distance between the linear first modified layers 83, the distance between the linear second modified layers 82, and the distance between the linear second modified layers 84 All the intervals can be appropriately adjusted according to the size of the target semiconductor wafer. In this specification, the so-called "interval between linear first modified layers 81" means "the shortest distance between the ends of adjacent linear first modified layers 81", for example, "linear first modified layers 81". The same applies to the space between the modified layers 83 of the same type, etc. However, in the first embodiment, as described above, for the thickness T 8 of the semiconductor wafer 8 when performing the first modifying step and the second modifying step, it is desirable to set the interval between these modified layers so that the semiconductor wafer The lengths of the shortest sides are equal or greater.

根據上述,得到半導體晶圓8,在第1區域80a中,以複數條的線狀第1改質層81以及複數條的線狀第1改質層83形成網目,同樣地,第2區域80b中,以複數條的線狀第2改質層82以及複數條的線狀第2改質層84形成網目。According to the above, the semiconductor wafer 8 is obtained. In the first region 80a, a plurality of linear first modified layers 81 and a plurality of linear first modified layers 83 form a mesh. Similarly, the second region 80b Among them, a plurality of linear second modified layers 82 and a plurality of linear second modified layers 84 form a mesh.

[第1實施形態中的分割步驟] 第4圖,係用以概略說明本發明的第1實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的分割步驟之放大剖面圖,第6圖是對應的立體圖。 上述分割步驟中,如第4(a)及6(a)圖,進行上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟後,研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b。 第4(a)及6(a)圖中半導體晶圓8的背面8b,係利用研磨手段6研磨時的面。又,第4(a)圖中的箭頭G,表示研磨時研磨手段6的動作。在此,顯示半導體晶圓8的背面8b上,透過研磨手段6沿著上述背面8b描繪圓移動,研磨上述背面8b的情況。又,未剖面顯示研磨手段6。[Segmentation procedure in the first embodiment] Fig. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically explaining the dividing step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and Fig. 6 is a corresponding perspective view. In the above-mentioned dividing step, as shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 6(a), the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is ground after the first modifying step and the second modifying step are performed. The back surface 8 b of the semiconductor wafer 8 in FIGS. 4( a ) and 6 ( a ) is the surface when it is polished by the polishing means 6 . Also, the arrow G in Fig. 4(a) indicates the operation of the polishing means 6 during polishing. Here, on the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the polishing means 6 is moved along the back surface 8b to draw a circle, and the above-mentioned back surface 8b is polished. Also, the grinding means 6 is not shown in section.

於是,在此研磨時同時,利用隨著此研磨對半導體晶圓8施加的力,在第1改質層81、第1改質層83、第2改質層82及第2改質層84的部位中,分割半導體晶圓8。此時,對半導體晶圓8施加的力,係從半導體晶圓8的背面8b向電路形成面8a的方向的力。第4圖中,符號89,由於這樣施力,半導體晶圓8中,顯示在連結其背面8b與電路形成面8a的方向中形成龜裂。這些龜裂89,形成後述的半導體晶片(半導體晶片8’)。在此,更具體而言,龜裂89,貫穿第1改質層81及第2改質層82形成,貫穿第1改質層83及第2改質層84形成(省略圖示)。又,第6(a)圖中,為了容易看圖,省略這些龜裂的圖示。Therefore, at the same time as this polishing, the first modified layer 81, the first modified layer 83, the second modified layer 82, and the second modified layer 84 are In the parts, the semiconductor wafer 8 is divided. At this time, the force applied to the semiconductor wafer 8 is a force in the direction from the back surface 8 b of the semiconductor wafer 8 toward the circuit formation surface 8 a. Reference numeral 89 in Fig. 4 indicates that cracks are formed on the semiconductor wafer 8 in the direction connecting the back surface 8b and the circuit formation surface 8a due to such force. These cracks 89 form a semiconductor wafer (semiconductor wafer 8') which will be described later. Here, more specifically, the crack 89 is formed penetrating through the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 , and formed through the first modified layer 83 and the second modified layer 84 (illustration omitted). In addition, in Fig. 6(a), illustration of these cracks is omitted for easy viewing.

這樣,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,半導體晶圓8的研磨面,即研磨時背面8b的位置,透過繼續研磨到達比研磨前半導體晶圓8中的第1改質層81及第1改質層83的位置更半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a側為止,最後,如第4(b)及6(b)圖所示,全部透過研磨使第1改質層81、第1改質層83、第2改質層82及第2改質層84消失,得到複數個半導體晶片8’ 。 又,第6(b)圖中,為了方便起見,明示1個半導體晶片8’,但以本步驟得到的半導體晶片8’是複數(多數)個。Like this, in the thickness T8 direction of semiconductor wafer 8, the grinding surface of semiconductor wafer 8, namely the position of back surface 8b during grinding, reaches the first modified layer 81 and the first modified layer 81 and the first in semiconductor wafer 8 before grinding by continuing grinding. 1. The position of the modified layer 83 is further to the circuit formation surface 8a side of the semiconductor wafer 8. Finally, as shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 6(b), the first modified layer 81, the first The modified layer 83, the second modified layer 82, and the second modified layer 84 disappear, and a plurality of semiconductor wafers 8' are obtained. Also, in FIG. 6(b), one semiconductor wafer 8' is clearly shown for convenience, but there are plural (many) semiconductor wafers 8' obtained in this step.

第4(b)及6(b)圖中,符號S8 ’,表示半導體晶片8’的一邊長。 在此,作為半導體晶片8’,顯示關於其平面形狀是正方形,其4邊長度(S8 ’)全部相同,S8 ’是半導體晶片8’的最短一邊的長度的情況。又,本實施形態中,半導體晶片的邊長,全部相同也可以,全部不同也可以,只一部分相同也可以。In Figures 4(b) and 6(b), the symbol S 8 ′ represents the length of one side of the semiconductor wafer 8 ′. Here, as the semiconductor wafer 8', it is shown that its planar shape is a square, and its four side lengths (S 8 ′) are all the same, where S 8 ′ is the length of the shortest side of the semiconductor wafer 8'. In addition, in this embodiment, the side lengths of the semiconductor wafers may be all the same, all may be different, or only some of them may be the same.

分割步驟中,研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b的方法,作為研磨手段6,可以是使用研磨機的眾所周知的方法。In the dividing step, the method of grinding the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 may be a well-known method using a grinding machine as the grinding means 6 .

本實施形態中,由於分割步驟前的半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a上先設置保護膜7,利用分割步驟,複數個半導體晶片8’ 全部得到在保護膜7上排列狀態的半導體晶片群8A’。這些全部半導體晶片8’,其電路形成面8a’ 以保護膜7保護的同時,以保護膜7穩定保持。第4(b)及6(b)圖中,符號8b’,表示半導體晶片8’的背面(即,與電路形成面8a’相反側的面)。In this embodiment, since the protective film 7 is first provided on the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8 before the dividing step, a plurality of semiconductor wafers 8' are all obtained in a semiconductor wafer group 8A arranged on the protective film 7 through the dividing step. '. All of these semiconductor wafers 8' are stably held by the protective film 7 while the circuit formation surface 8a' is protected by the protective film 7. In FIGS. 4(b) and 6(b), reference numeral 8b' denotes the back surface of the semiconductor wafer 8' (that is, the surface opposite to the circuit formation surface 8a').

第4(a)圖中顯示,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,半導體晶圓8的研磨面(研磨時的背面)8b的位置,透過研磨未到達第2改質層82及第2改質層84的位置的階段(換言之,第2改質層82及第2改質層84透過研磨未消失的階段),形成龜裂89的狀態。但是,這樣的龜裂89之狀態是一例。第1實施形態中的分割步驟中,形成龜裂89的時期,例如,半導體晶圓8的研磨面(背面) 8b的上述位置,透過研磨重疊在第2改質層82及第2改質層84的位置的階段(換言之,第2改質層82及第2改質層84透過研磨消失中的階段)也可以,透過研磨通過第2改質層82及第2改質層84的位置,未到達第1改質層81及第1改質層83的位置的階段(換言之,第2改質層82及第2改質層84透過研磨完成消失,且透過研磨第1改質層81及第1改質層83未消失的階段)也可以Figure 4(a) shows that in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8, the position of the grinding surface (back surface during grinding) 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 does not reach the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 82 through grinding. The state of the position of the modified layer 84 (in other words, the stage where the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 84 have not disappeared through polishing) is the state of the crack 89 . However, such a state of cracks 89 is an example. In the division step in the first embodiment, when the crack 89 is formed, for example, the above-mentioned position on the polished surface (back surface) 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is superimposed on the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer by polishing. 84 (in other words, the stage in which the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 84 are disappearing through grinding) may also pass through the position of the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 84 by grinding. The stage before reaching the position of the first modified layer 81 and the first modified layer 83 (in other words, the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 84 disappear through grinding, and the first modified layer 81 and The stage where the first modified layer 83 has not disappeared) can also be

又,第4(a)圖中,顯示此剖面中全部的龜裂89同樣形成的狀態。但是,這樣的龜裂89的狀態是一例,分割步驟的任一階段中,複數龜裂89的狀態互為相同也可以,互不相同也可以。例如,複數龜裂89的長度互為相同也可以,互不相同也可以。又,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,龜裂89一端的位置,在複數龜裂89之間互為相同也可以,互不相同也可以。同樣地,龜裂89另一端的位置,在複數龜裂89之間互為相同也可以,互不相同也可以。Also, Fig. 4(a) shows a state where all the cracks 89 are formed in the same manner in this section. However, the state of such fissures 89 is an example, and the states of the plurality of fissures 89 may be the same or different in any stage of the dividing step. For example, the lengths of the plurality of fissures 89 may be the same or different from each other. In addition, the position of one end of the crack 89 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 may be the same or different among the plurality of cracks 89 . Similarly, the positions of the other ends of the cracks 89 may be the same or different among the plurality of cracks 89 .

又,第4(b)及6(b)圖中顯示,直到第1改質層81、第1改質層83、第2改質層82及第2改質層84透過研磨全部消失為止,研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b的狀態。在此情況下,得到的半導體晶片8’的內部,第1改質層81、第1改質層83、第2改質層82及第2改質層84全部不存在。但是,這樣的研磨面(研磨時的背面) 8b的最後位置,是一例。例如,分割步驟中,透過研磨使第2改質層82及第2改質層84消失,且不使第1改質層81及第1改質層83因研磨消失,而研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b。在此情況下,得到的半導體晶片8’(例如,半導體晶片8’的周緣部)中,存在至少一部分第1改質層81或第1改質層83。但是,這樣存在第1改質層81或第1改質層83的半導體晶片8’,因為有機械強度低的可能性,分割步驟中,如第4(b) 及6(b)圖所示,直到透過研磨使第1改質層81及第1改質層83消失為止,理想是研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b。Also, as shown in Figures 4(b) and 6(b), until the first modified layer 81, the first modified layer 83, the second modified layer 82, and the second modified layer 84 are all disappeared by grinding, The state of grinding the back surface 8 b of the semiconductor wafer 8 . In this case, all of the first modified layer 81, the first modified layer 83, the second modified layer 82, and the second modified layer 84 do not exist in the obtained semiconductor wafer 8'. However, the final position of such a polished surface (back surface during polishing) 8b is an example. For example, in the dividing step, the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 84 are eliminated by grinding, and the semiconductor wafer 8 is ground without removing the first modified layer 81 and the first modified layer 83 by grinding. 8b on the back. In this case, at least a part of the first modified layer 81 or the first modified layer 83 exists in the obtained semiconductor wafer 8' (for example, the peripheral portion of the semiconductor wafer 8'). However, the semiconductor wafer 8' having the first modified layer 81 or the first modified layer 83 in this way may have a low mechanical strength. , until the first modified layer 81 and the first modified layer 83 disappear by polishing, preferably, the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is polished.

第1實施形態的分割步驟中,第1改質層81、第1改質層83、第2改質層82及第2改質層84其中任一的一部分中,不分割半導體晶圓8(未形成龜裂89)也可以。其理由是,即使這些改質層的一部分不分割半導體晶圓8,在後述的拾起步驟中,也會確實分割(切斷)上述部位。但是,為了更確實製造目標半導體晶片,在分割步驟中,第1改質層81、第1改質層83、第2改質層82及第2改質層84全部的部位中,理想是分割半導體晶圓8。這樣,這些改質層全部的部位中是否分割半導體晶圓8,例如,研磨上述背面8b時,根據對半導體晶圓8的施力大小,可以調節。In the dividing step of the first embodiment, the semiconductor wafer 8 ( No cracks 89) may be formed. The reason is that even if the semiconductor wafer 8 is not divided in part of these modified layers, the above-mentioned portion will be surely divided (cut) in a pick-up step described later. However, in order to more reliably manufacture the target semiconductor wafer, in the dividing step, it is desirable to divide all parts of the first modified layer 81, the first modified layer 83, the second modified layer 82, and the second modified layer 84. Semiconductor Wafer 8 . In this way, whether or not to divide the semiconductor wafer 8 in all the modified layers can be adjusted according to the force applied to the semiconductor wafer 8 when, for example, the back surface 8b is ground.

第1實施形態的分割步驟中,上述背面8b的研磨結束時,存在未形成半導體晶片8’的區域也可以(換言之,半導體晶圓8的分割沒結束也可以)。其理由是,即使像這樣沒完成半導體晶圓8的分割,在後述的拾起步驟中,也確實分割(切斷)上述部位。但是,為了更確實製造目標半導體晶片,理想是在分割步驟中完成半導體晶圓8的分割。是否這樣完成半導體晶圓8的分割,例如,在上述背面8b的研磨時,透過對半導體晶圓8施力的大小,可以調節。這些方面,在後述的其它實施形態的分割步驟中也相同。In the dividing step of the first embodiment, when the grinding of the back surface 8b is completed, there may be a region where the semiconductor wafer 8' is not formed (in other words, the dividing of the semiconductor wafer 8 may not be completed). The reason is that even if the division of the semiconductor wafer 8 is not completed in this way, the above-mentioned portion is surely divided (cut) in the pick-up step described later. However, in order to manufacture the target semiconductor wafer more reliably, it is desirable to complete the division of the semiconductor wafer 8 in the division step. Whether the division of the semiconductor wafer 8 is completed in this way can be adjusted, for example, through the magnitude of the force applied to the semiconductor wafer 8 during the grinding of the back surface 8b. These points are also the same in the division steps of other embodiments described later.

在此,作為第1實施形態,說明關於上述剖面中在連結半導體晶圓的電路形成面及背面的方向形成一列之線狀的第1改質層及第2改質層的數量都是1時的半導體晶片的製造方法,但本實施形態的半導體晶片的製造方法,不限於這樣的方法。以下,說明關於這樣的其它半導體晶片的製造方法。Here, as a first embodiment, a description will be given of a case where the number of linear first modified layers and second modified layers is one in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface and the rear surface of the semiconductor wafer in the above cross section. The method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer, but the method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer in this embodiment is not limited to such a method. Hereinafter, a method of manufacturing such another semiconductor wafer will be described.

>第2實施形態> 第7圖係用以概略說明本發明的第2實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之放大剖面圖。 本實施形態,上述剖面(更具體而言,對半導體晶圓的電路形成面或背面直交的方向中半導體晶圓的剖面)中,連結半導體晶圓的電路形成面及背面的方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層數量都是2時半導體晶片的製造方法。>Second Embodiment> Fig. 7 is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically explaining the first modifying step and the second modifying step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, in the above-mentioned cross section (more specifically, a cross section of the semiconductor wafer in a direction perpendicular to the circuit formation surface or the back surface of the semiconductor wafer), in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface and the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, a row is formed. The method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer when the number of linear first modifying layers and the number of second modifying layers are both 2.

[第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟] 第2實施形態中的上述第1改質步驟,如第7(a)圖所示,透過從半導體晶圓8的背面8b側對半導體晶圓8照射雷射光R1 ,半導體晶圓8的內部中,從半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a到215μm(微米)深度的第1區域80a中,形成第1改質層811以及比此第1改質層811更上述背面8b側還有第1改質層812。這樣,在第1區域80a中透過形成複數第1改質層,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。[The first modifying step in the second embodiment] In the above-mentioned first modifying step in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8 is irradiated with laser light R1 , and in the inside of the semiconductor wafer 8, the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 811 are formed in the first region 80a at a depth of 215 μm (micrometer) from the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8 to a depth of 215 μm (micrometer). The modified layer 811 further includes a first modified layer 812 on the back surface 8 b side. In this way, by forming a plurality of first modified layers in the first region 80a, the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟,在第1區域80a中,代替形成1條線狀第1改質層(即,第1改質層81),除了半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中在互相分離的位置形成2條線狀第1改質層(即,第1改質層811及第1改質層812)以外,與第1實施形態中的第1改質步驟相同。In the first modifying step in the second embodiment, in the first region 80a, instead of forming a linear first modified layer (that is, the first modified layer 81), except that the semiconductor wafer 8 has a thickness T8 The first modifying step in the first embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment except that two linear first modifying layers (namely, the first modifying layer 811 and the first modifying layer 812 ) are formed at positions separated from each other in the direction.

第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟中,第1改質層811及第1改質層812,在後述的分割步驟中,為了得到目標尺寸的半導體晶片,都在第1區域80a沿著電路形成面8a形成線狀。線狀的第1改質層811及第1改質層812,都對電路形成面8a,成為平行或大致平行。In the first modifying step in the second embodiment, the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 are formed in the first region 80a along the The circuit formation surface 8a is formed in a linear shape. Both the linear first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 are parallel or substantially parallel to the circuit formation surface 8 a.

第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟中,第1改質層811及第1改質層812,都是除了在第1區域80a中的形成位置能夠不同之外,可以利用與第1實施形態中第1改質步驟中的第1改質層81的情況相同的方法形成。In the first modifying step in the second embodiment, both the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 can be formed in different positions in the first region 80a, and the same method as in the first embodiment can be used. The first reforming layer 81 in the first reforming step in the configuration is formed in the same manner.

第2實施形態中,第1改質層811及第1改質層812在第1區域80a中的形成位置,都與第1實施形態中的第1改質層81的形成位置相同。但是,互相改變第1改質層811及第1改質層812的形成位置。In the second embodiment, the formation positions of the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 in the first region 80a are the same as the formation positions of the first modified layer 81 in the first embodiment. However, the formation positions of the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 are changed from each other.

例如,第1實施形態中,說明關於第1區域80a中的第1改質層81的想理形成位置,但第2實施形態中,最好是第1改質層811及第1改質層812至少一方滿足這樣的理想形成位置條件,第1改質層811及第1改質層812兩方滿足這樣的理想形成位置條件更好。 例如,第2實施形態中,第1改質層811及第1改質層812的形成位置,都是離半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a,理想是65〜215μm,更理想是65〜195μm,又更理想是65〜175μm,特別理想是65〜155μm深度的區域中的任一位置皆可。For example, in the first embodiment, the ideal formation position of the first modified layer 81 in the first region 80a was described, but in the second embodiment, it is preferable that the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer At least one of 812 satisfies such an ideal formation position condition, and it is better that both the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 satisfy such an ideal formation position condition. For example, in the second embodiment, the formation positions of the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 are both separated from the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8, preferably 65 to 215 μm, and more preferably 65 to 195 μm. , and more preferably 65-175 μm, particularly ideally any position in the region of 65-155 μm depth.

第1改質層811及第1改質層812都具有與第1實施形態中的第1改質層81相同的形狀。於是,線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812,互為相同的形狀也可以,互不相同的形狀也可以。例如,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中第1改質層811的擴大寬度(換言之,第1改質層811的高度),與第1改質層812的擴大寬度(換言之,第1改質層812的高度) 相同也可以,不同也可以。Both the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 have the same shape as the first modified layer 81 in the first embodiment. Therefore, the linear first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 may have the same shape or different shapes. For example, the enlarged width of the first modified layer 811 (in other words, the height of the first modified layer 811) in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 is different from the enlarged width of the first modified layer 812 (in other words, the height of the first modified layer 811). The height of the layer 812) may be the same or different.

第1改質層811與第1改質層812之間的距離Δ11 ,只要不損害本發明的效果,不特別限定,但理想是0〜60μm,更理想是20〜50μm。由於上述Δ11 在這樣的範圍,第1改質層811與第1改質層812都形成,產生的效果變更高。 上述Δ11 ,意味在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中第1改質層811的上端與第1改質層812的下端之間的距離。Δ11 為0μm是第1改質層811的上端與第1改質層812的下端相接的情況。The distance Δ 11 between the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 is not particularly limited as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired, but is preferably 0 to 60 μm, more preferably 20 to 50 μm. Since the above-mentioned Δ11 is in such a range, both the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 are formed, and the effect produced becomes higher. The above Δ 11 means the distance between the upper end of the first modified layer 811 and the lower end of the first modified layer 812 in the thickness T 8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 . Δ11 is 0 μm when the upper end of the first modified layer 811 is in contact with the lower end of the first modified layer 812 .

線狀第1改質層811與第1改質層812,理想是互為平行。藉此,半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果變更高,後述分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。The linear first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 are ideally parallel to each other. Thereby, the effect of suppressing warpage of the semiconductor wafer is increased, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟中,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,理想是在第1改質層811的正上方形成第1改質層812。這樣,半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果變更高,後述分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。 本說明書中,「半導體晶圓的厚度方向中,第1改質層的正上方形成第1改質層」,意味「半導體晶圓的厚度方向中,這些第1改質層的位置不同,且對半導體晶圓的表面平行的方向(換言之,對半導體晶圓的厚度方向直交的方向)中,為了使這些第1改質層的位置相同,考慮一方的第1改質層的位置,形成另一方的第1改質層」。這在後述的第2改質層的情況也是相同。In the first modifying step in the second embodiment, it is desirable to form the first modified layer 812 directly above the first modified layer 811 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 . In this way, the bowing suppression effect of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later. In this specification, "the first modified layer is formed directly above the first modified layer in the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer" means "the positions of these first modified layers are different in the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer, and In the direction parallel to the surface of the semiconductor wafer (in other words, the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer), in order to make the positions of these first modified layers the same, the position of one of the first modified layers is considered, and the other is formed. The first modified layer of one side". The same applies to the case of the second modified layer described later.

第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟,第1實施形態中的第1改質層81及第2改質層82的情況相同,形成離雷射光R1 的光源遠的第1改質層811後,形成離雷射光R1 的光源近的第1改質層812。藉此,不伴隨步驟異常,可以形成第1改質層811及第1改質層812。形成第1改質層812後,因為此第1改質層812妨礙雷射光R1 的透過,形成第1改質層811是困難的。In the first modifying step in the second embodiment, the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 in the first embodiment are formed in the same manner as the first modified layer far from the light source of the laser light R1 . After 811, the first modified layer 812 close to the light source of the laser light R1 is formed. Thereby, the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 can be formed without step abnormality. After forming the first modified layer 812, it is difficult to form the first modified layer 811 because the first modified layer 812 hinders the transmission of the laser light R1 .

形成第1改質層812時使用的雷射光R1 的光源,與形成第1改質層811時使用的雷射光R1 的光源相同也可以(形成第1改質層811時的上述光源,兼形成第1改質層812時的上述光源也可以)。The light source of the laser light R1 used when forming the first modified layer 812 may be the same as the light source of the laser light R1 used when forming the first modified layer 811 (the above-mentioned light source when forming the first modified layer 811, The light source described above when forming the first modified layer 812 may also be used).

線狀第1改質層812長邊方向的長度,理想是線狀第1改質層811長邊方向的長度的90〜110%,100%(換言之,與線狀第1改質層811長邊方向的長度相同)更理想。藉此,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。The length of the linear first modified layer 812 in the longitudinal direction is ideally 90 to 110% or 100% of the length of the linear first modified layer 811 in the longitudinal direction (in other words, it is as long as the linear first modified layer 811). The same length in the side direction) is more ideal. Thereby, in the dividing step described later, the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision.

對半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a或背面8b平行的方向中,線狀第1改質層812的一端部位置,與線狀第1改質層811的一端部位置一致也可以,不一致也可以,但理想是一致。由於這些位置一致,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度分割半導體晶圓。線狀第1改質層812的另一端部位置與線狀第1改質層811的另一端部位置的關係也與上述一端部的情況相同。In a direction parallel to the circuit formation surface 8a or the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the position of one end of the linear first modified layer 812 may coincide with the position of one end of the linear first modified layer 811, or may not coincide. Yes, but the ideal is to be consistent. Since these positions coincide, the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher accuracy in the dividing step described later. The relationship between the position of the other end of the linear first modified layer 812 and the position of the other end of the linear first modified layer 811 is also the same as that of the above-mentioned one end.

[第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟] 第2實施形態中的上述第2改質步驟中,如第7(b)圖所示,透過從半導體晶圓8的背面8b側對半導體晶圓8照射雷射光R2 ,半導體晶圓8的內部中,從背面8b到215μm(微米)深度的第2區域80b中,且比第1改質層812更上述背面8b側之處形成第2改質層821,以及比此第2改質層821更上述背面8b側,再形成第2改質層822。這樣,透過在第2區域80b中形成複數第2改質層,在後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。[Second Modification Step in Second Embodiment] In the above-mentioned second modification step in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. The circle 8 is irradiated with laser light R 2 , and in the inside of the semiconductor wafer 8, in the second region 80b from the back surface 8b to a depth of 215 μm (micrometer), the second modified layer 812 is further formed on the side of the back surface 8b. The modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 821 are further formed on the rear surface 8b side. In this way, by forming the plurality of second modified layers in the second region 80b, the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

第2實施形態中,第2改質層821及第2改質層822,都在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中比最上述背面8b側形成的第1改質層(即,第1改質層812)往更上述背面8b側形成。In the second embodiment, both the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are formed in the direction of the thickness T8 of the semiconductor wafer 8 from the first modified layer (i.e., the first modified layer formed on the side of the rear surface 8b most described above). Modified layer 812) is formed toward the above-mentioned rear surface 8b side.

第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟,在第2區域80b中,代替形成1條線狀第2改質層(即,第2改質層82),半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中互相分離的位置上,2條線狀第2改質層(即,第2改質層821及第2改質層822)以外,與第1實施形態中的第2改質步驟相同。In the second modification step in the second embodiment, in the second region 80b, instead of forming a linear second modification layer (that is, the second modification layer 82), the thickness T of the semiconductor wafer 8 in the 8 direction The second modifying step in the first embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment except for the two linear second modifying layers (ie, the second modifying layer 821 and the second modifying layer 822 ) at positions separated from each other.

第2改質層821及第2改質層822,在半導體晶圓8中的形成處不同之外,可以利用與第1改質層811的情況相同的方法形成。 更具體地,第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟中,第2改質層821及第2改質層822在後述的分割步驟中,為了得到目標尺寸的半導體晶片,在第2區域80b,都沿著背面8b形成線狀。線狀的第2改質層821及第2改質層822,對背面8b,都成平行或大致平行。The second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 can be formed by the same method as that of the first modified layer 811 except that the places where they are formed in the semiconductor wafer 8 are different. More specifically, in the second modifying step in the second embodiment, the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are formed in the second region 80b in order to obtain a semiconductor wafer having a target size in the dividing step described later. , all form a line along the back surface 8b. Both the linear second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are parallel or substantially parallel to the back surface 8b.

第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟中,第2改質層821及第2改質層822,除了在第2區域80b中的形成位置能夠不同之外,可以利用與第1實施形態中第2改質步驟中的第2改質層82的情況相同的方法形成。In the second modifying step in the second embodiment, the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 can be formed in different positions in the second region 80b, and the same method as in the first embodiment can be used. The second reforming layer 82 in the second reforming step is formed by the same method.

第2實施形態中,第2改質層821及第2改質層822,在第2區域80b中的形成位置,都與第1實施形態中的第2改質層82的形成位置相同。但是,互相改變第2改質層821及第2改質層822的形成位置。In the second embodiment, the formation positions of the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 in the second region 80b are the same as those of the second modified layer 82 in the first embodiment. However, the formation positions of the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are changed from each other.

例如,第1實施形態中,說明關於第2區域80b中的第2改質層82的理想形成位置,但第2實施形態中,最好是第2改質層821及第2改質層822至少一方滿足這樣的理想形成位置條件,第2改質層821及第2改質層822兩方滿足這樣的理想形成位置條件更好。 例如,第2實施形態中,第2改質層821及第2改質層822的形成位置,都是離半導體晶圓8的背面8b,理想是65〜215μm,更理想是65〜195μm,又更理想是65〜175μm,特別理想是65〜155μm深度的區域中的任一位置皆可。For example, in the first embodiment, the ideal position for forming the second modified layer 82 in the second region 80b was described, but in the second embodiment, the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are preferably formed. At least one of them satisfies such an ideal formation position condition, and it is more preferable that both the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 satisfy such an ideal formation position condition. For example, in the second embodiment, the formation positions of the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are both away from the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, preferably 65-215 μm, more preferably 65-195 μm, and More preferably, it is 65 to 175 μm, particularly preferably, any position in the depth region of 65 to 155 μm is acceptable.

第2改質層821及第2改質層822都具有與第1實施形態中第2改質層82相同的形狀。於是,線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822互為相同形狀也可以,不同形狀也可以。例如,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中第2改質層821的擴大寬度(換言之,第2改質層821的高度),與第2改質層822的寬度(換言之,第2改質層822的高度)互為相同也可以,不同也可以。Both the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 have the same shape as the second modified layer 82 in the first embodiment. Therefore, the linear second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 may have the same shape or different shapes. For example, the expanded width of the second modified layer 821 (in other words, the height of the second modified layer 821) in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 is different from the width of the second modified layer 822 (in other words, the height of the second modified layer 821). The height of the layer 822) may be the same as or different from each other.

第2改質層821與第2改質層822之間的距離Δ22 ,只要不損害本發明的效果,不特別限定,但理想是與上述距離Δ11 相同的數值範圍,Δ22 的值與Δ11 的值相同也可以,不同也可以。由於上述Δ22 在這樣的數值範圍,第2改質層821與第2改質層822都形成,產生的效果變更高。 上述Δ22 ,意味在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中第2改質層821的上端與第2改質層822的下端之間的距離。The distance Δ22 between the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 is not particularly limited as long as it does not impair the effect of the present invention, but it is ideally within the same numerical range as the above-mentioned distance Δ11 , and the value of Δ22 is the same as The values of Δ11 may be the same or different. Since the above-mentioned Δ22 is in such a numerical range, both the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are formed, and the effect produced becomes higher. The aforementioned Δ 22 means the distance between the upper end of the second modified layer 821 and the lower end of the second modified layer 822 in the thickness T 8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 .

線狀的第2改質層821與第2改質層822,理想是互為平行。藉此,半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果變更高,後述分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。The linear second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are ideally parallel to each other. Thereby, the effect of suppressing warpage of the semiconductor wafer is increased, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟中,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,理想是在第1改質層812的正上方形成第2改質層821。這樣,半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果變更高,後述分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。In the second modifying step in the second embodiment, it is desirable to form the second modified layer 821 directly above the first modified layer 812 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 . In this way, the bowing suppression effect of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

同樣地,第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟中,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,理想是在第2改質層821的正上方形成第2改質層822。藉此,半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果變更高,後述分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。Similarly, in the second modifying step in the second embodiment, it is desirable to form the second modified layer 822 directly above the second modified layer 821 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 . Thereby, the effect of suppressing warpage of the semiconductor wafer is increased, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

第2實施形態中的第2改質層步驟,第2實施形態中第1改層步驟中的第1改質層811及第2改質層812的情況相同,形成離雷射光R2 的光源遠的第2改質層821後,形成離雷射光R2 的光源近的第2改質層822。藉此,不伴隨步驟異常,可以形成第2改質層821及第2改質層822。形成第2改質層822後,因為此第2改質層822妨礙雷射光R2 的透過,形成第2改質層821是困難的。In the second modified layer step in the second embodiment, the situation of the first modified layer 811 and the second modified layer 812 in the first modified layer step in the second embodiment is the same, and the light source of the laser light R 2 is formed. After the second modified layer 821 far away, the second modified layer 822 close to the light source of the laser light R2 is formed. Thereby, the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 can be formed without step abnormality. After forming the second modified layer 822, it is difficult to form the second modified layer 821 because the second modified layer 822 hinders the transmission of the laser light R2 .

形成第2改質層822時使用的雷射光R2 的光源,與形成第2改質層821時使用的雷射光R2 的光源相同也可以(形成第2改質層821時的上述光源,兼形成第2改質層822時的上述光源也可以)。The light source of the laser light R2 used when forming the second modified layer 822 may be the same as the light source of the laser light R2 used when forming the second modified layer 821 (the above-mentioned light source when forming the second modified layer 821, The light source described above when forming the second modified layer 822 may also be used).

又,形成第2改質層821或第2改質層822時使用的雷射光R2 的光源,與形成第1改質層811或第1改質層812時使用的雷射光R1 的光源相同也可以(雷射光R2 的光源,兼雷射光R1 的光源也可以)。Moreover, the light source of the laser light R2 used when forming the second modified layer 821 or the second modified layer 822 is the same as the light source of the laser light R1 used when forming the first modified layer 811 or the first modified layer 812. The same is also possible (the light source of the laser light R2 and the light source of the laser light R1 are also possible).

線狀第2改質層822在長邊方向的長度,理想是線狀第2改質層821長邊方向的長度的90〜110%,100%(換言之,與線狀第2改質層821在長邊方向的長度相同)更理想。藉此,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。The length of the linear second modified layer 822 in the longitudinal direction is ideally 90 to 110% or 100% of the length of the linear second modified layer 821 in the longitudinal direction (in other words, the same as the linear second modified layer 821 The same length in the long side direction) is more desirable. Thereby, in the dividing step described later, the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision.

對半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a或背面8b平行的方向中,線狀第2改質層822的一端部位置,與線狀第2改質層821的一端部位置一致也可以,不一致也可以,但理想是一致。由於這些位置一致,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度分割半導體晶圓。線狀第2改質層822的另一端部位置與線狀第2改質層821的另一端部位置的關係也與上述一端部的情況相同。In a direction parallel to the circuit-formed surface 8a or the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the position of one end of the linear second modified layer 822 may coincide with the position of one end of the linear second modified layer 821, or may not coincide. Yes, but the ideal is to be consistent. Since these positions coincide, the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher accuracy in the dividing step described later. The relationship between the position of the other end of the linear second modified layer 822 and the position of the other end of the linear second modified layer 821 is also the same as that of the above-mentioned one end.

第2實施例中第1改質層812與第2改質層821之間的距離Δ12 ,與第1實施形態中第1改質層81與第2改質層82之間的距離Δ12 相同,達成那情況的效果也第1實施形態的情況相同。 第2實施例中上述Δ12 意味在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中第1改質層812的上端與第2改質層821的下端之間的距離。 這樣,本說明書中,半導體晶圓的厚度方向中,形成一列的第1改質層及第2改質層的任一方或兩方存在複數時,所謂「第1改質層與第2改質層之間的距離Δ12 」,意味「半導體晶圓的厚度方向中,第1改質層與第2改質層之間存在的最近距離」。The distance Δ 12 between the first modified layer 812 and the second modified layer 821 in the second embodiment is the same as the distance Δ 12 between the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 in the first embodiment Similarly, the effect of achieving that is also the same as that of the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, the aforementioned Δ12 means the distance between the upper end of the first modified layer 812 and the lower end of the second modified layer 821 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 . Thus, in this specification, when there are plural numbers of either or both of the first modified layer and the second modified layer forming a row in the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer, the so-called "first modified layer and second modified layer The inter-layer distance Δ 12 ” means “the shortest distance existing between the first modified layer and the second modified layer in the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer”.

線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822,對於線狀第1改質層811與第1改質層812,理想是平行的。藉此,半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果變更高,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度分割半導體晶圓。The linear second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 are ideally parallel to the linear first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 . Thereby, the effect of suppressing bowing of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟中,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,理想是在第1改質層811及第1改質層812的正上方形成第2改質層821及第2改質層822。這樣,半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果變更高,後述分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。In the second modifying step in the second embodiment, it is desirable to form the second modified layer 821 directly above the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8. and the second modified layer 822 . In this way, the bowing suppression effect of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822在長邊方向的長度,理想都是線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812在長邊方向長度的90〜110%,100%(換言之,與線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812在長邊方向的長度相同)更理想。藉此,半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果變更高,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。The length of the linear second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 in the longitudinal direction is ideally 90 to 110% of the length of the linear first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 in the longitudinal direction. , 100% (in other words, the same length as the linear first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 in the longitudinal direction) is more ideal. Thereby, the bowing suppressing effect of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

對半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a或背面8b平行的方向中,線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822的一端部位置,與線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812的一端部位置一致也可以,不一致也可以,但理想是一致。由於這些位置一致,半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果變更高,後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度分割半導體晶圓。線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822的另一端部位置與線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812的另一端部位置的關係也與上述一端部的情況相同。In the direction parallel to the circuit formation surface 8a or the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the position of one end of the linear second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 is close to the linear first modified layer 811 and the first linear modified layer 811. The position of one end of the reforming layer 812 may or may not be the same, but is ideally the same. Since these positions match, the effect of suppressing warpage of the semiconductor wafer becomes higher, and the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later. The relationship between the position of the other end of the linear second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 and the position of the other end of the linear first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 is also the same as that of the above-mentioned one end. same.

第2實施形態中,像這樣,上述剖面中,在連結半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a及背面8b的方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層的數量都是2。於是半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層的數量理想都是2。In the second embodiment, in the above cross-section, in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface 8a and the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the number of linear first modified layers and second modified layers formed in a row is the same. is 2. Therefore, in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 , the number of linear first modified layers and second modified layers forming a row is ideally two.

第2實施形態中,像這樣,在對半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a或背面8b平行的一方向中,一邊錯開位置,一邊遍及半導體晶圓8全區重複進行線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812與線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822的形成(即,重複進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟),藉此,如第7(c)圖所示,分別形成複數條線狀第1改質層811、第1改質層812、第2改質層821及第2改質層822。 這樣重複形成的線狀第1改質層811、第1改質層812、第2改質層821及第2改質層822,都只要以目前為止說明的線狀第1改質層811、第1改質層812、第2改質層821及第2改質層822的情況相同的方法形成即可。 又,第7(c)圖中,為了方便起見,只不過顯示各6條線狀第1改質層811、第1改質層812、第2改質層821及第2改質層822,但這些改質層,考慮製作的半導體晶片尺寸,形成比這些多的條數。In the second embodiment, in this way, in a direction parallel to the circuit formation surface 8a or the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, while shifting positions, the linear first modifying layer is repeatedly applied over the entire area of the semiconductor wafer 8. 811 and the first modifying layer 812 and the linear second modifying layer 821 and the second modifying layer 822 (that is, repeating the first modifying step and the second modifying step), whereby, as in the seventh (c) As shown in the figure, a plurality of linear first modified layers 811 , first modified layers 812 , second modified layers 821 and second modified layers 822 are respectively formed. The linear first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 812, the second modified layer 821, and the second modified layer 822 formed repeatedly in this way only need to use the linear first modified layer 811, The first modified layer 812, the second modified layer 821, and the second modified layer 822 may be formed by the same method. Also, in Fig. 7(c), for the sake of convenience, only six linear first modified layers 811, 1st modified layer 812, second modified layer 821, and second modified layer 822 are shown. , but these modifying layers are formed in a larger number than these in consideration of the size of the semiconductor wafer to be produced.

此時,全部線狀第1改質層811,理想是形成互相平行。 同樣地,全部線狀第1改質層812,理想是形成互相平行。 同樣地,全部線狀第2改質層821,理想是形成互相平行。 同樣地,全部線狀第2改質層822,理想是形成互相平行。At this time, all the linear first modifying layers 811 are ideally formed parallel to each other. Likewise, all linear first modifying layers 812 are ideally formed parallel to each other. Likewise, all the linear second modifying layers 821 are ideally formed parallel to each other. Likewise, all the linear second modifying layers 822 are ideally formed parallel to each other.

第2實施形態中,像這樣,沿著半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a,第1區域80a中形成多數的線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812,沿著半導體晶圓8的背面8b,在第2區域80b中形成多數的線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822。結果,得到半導體晶圓8,在第1區域80a中具有1層配置多數的(複數條)線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812的層,在第2區域80b中具有1層配置多數的(複數條)線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822的層。In the second embodiment, in this way, a large number of linear first modified layers 811 and 812 are formed in the first region 80a along the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8, and along the semiconductor wafer 8 8, a large number of linear second modified layers 821 and second modified layers 822 are formed in the second region 80b. As a result, a semiconductor wafer 8 is obtained, which has a layer in which a large number of (plural) linear first modified layers 811 and 812 are arranged in one layer in the first region 80a, and has one layer in the second region 80b. A plurality of (plural) linear second modified layers 821 and second modified layers 822 are arranged in layers.

第2實施形態中,又,如第7(d)圖所示,利用與上述第1改質層811的情況相同的方法在第1區域80a中另外形成多數與上述第1改質層811交叉的線狀第1改質層831,利用與上述第1改質層812的情況相同的方法在第1區域80a中另外形成多數與上述第1改質層812交叉的線狀第1改質層832。又,利用與上述第2改質層821的情況相同的方法在第2區域80b中另外形成多數與上述第2改質層821交叉的線狀第2改質層841,利用與上述第21改質層822的情況相同的方法在第2區域80b中另外形成多數與上述第2改質層822交叉的線狀第2改質層842。此時,與形成第1改質層811及第1改質層812的情況相同,形成第1改質層831後,形成第1改質層832。於是,與形成第2改質層821及第2改質層822的情況相同,形成第2改質層841之後形成第2改質層842。In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7(d), by the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned first modified layer 811, in the first region 80a, a large number of layers intersecting with the above-mentioned first modified layer 811 are additionally formed. In the first region 80a, a large number of linear first modified layers crossing the first modified layer 812 are additionally formed in the first region 80a by the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned first modified layer 812. 832. In addition, a large number of linear second modified layers 841 intersecting the second modified layer 821 are separately formed in the second region 80b by the same method as in the case of the second modified layer 821 described above. In the same manner as in the case of the modified layer 822, a large number of linear second modified layers 842 intersecting the above-mentioned second modified layer 822 are separately formed in the second region 80b. At this time, as in the case of forming the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 , after the first modified layer 831 is formed, the first modified layer 832 is formed. Then, as in the case of forming the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 , the second modified layer 842 is formed after the second modified layer 841 is formed.

又,第7(d)圖,在半導體晶圓8的剖面中,顯示第1改質層831、第1改質層832、第2改質層841及第2改質層842都重疊的情況,但根據半導體晶圓8的剖面位置,此剖面中,有時這些改質層不重疊。In addition, FIG. 7(d) shows the situation where the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 832, the second modified layer 841, and the second modified layer 842 all overlap in the cross section of the semiconductor wafer 8. , but depending on the cross-sectional position of the semiconductor wafer 8, these modified layers may not overlap in this cross-section.

線狀第1改質層831與線狀第1改質層811的交叉角度、線狀第1改質層832與線狀第1改質層812的交叉角度、線狀第2改質層841與線狀第2改質層821的交叉角度以及線狀第2改質層842與線狀第2改質層822的交叉角度,都可以設定與第1實施形態中的線狀第1改質層83與線狀第1改質層81的交叉角度相同。The crossing angle between the linear first modified layer 831 and the linear first modified layer 811 , the crossing angle between the linear first modified layer 832 and the linear first modified layer 812 , the linear second modified layer 841 The angle of intersection with the linear second modified layer 821 and the angle of intersection between the linear second modified layer 842 and the linear second modified layer 822 can be set to those of the linear first modified layer in the first embodiment. The intersecting angles of the layer 83 and the linear first modified layer 81 are the same.

半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,第1改質層831的擴大寬度(換言之,第1改質層831的高度),不特別限定,可以與上述第1改質層811的擴大寬度相同的數值範圍,理想是與第1改質層811的擴大寬度相同程度的值。 半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,第1改質層812的擴大寬度與第1改質層832的擴大寬度的關係也相同。 半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,第2改質層841的擴大寬度(換言之,第2改質層841的高度),不特別限定,可以與上述第2改質層821的擴大寬度相同的數值範圍,理想是與第2改質層821的擴大寬度相同程度的值。 半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,第2改質層842的擴大寬度與第2改質層822的擴大寬度的關係也相同。In the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8, the enlarged width of the first modified layer 831 (in other words, the height of the first modified layer 831) is not particularly limited, and may be the same as the enlarged width of the first modified layer 811 described above. The numerical range of is ideally a value approximately the same as the enlarged width of the first modified layer 811 . The relationship between the expanded width of the first modified layer 812 and the expanded width of the first modified layer 832 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 is also the same. In the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8, the enlarged width of the second modified layer 841 (in other words, the height of the second modified layer 841) is not particularly limited, and may be the same as the enlarged width of the second modified layer 821 described above. The numerical range of is ideally a value approximately the same as the enlarged width of the second modified layer 821 . The relationship between the expanded width of the second modified layer 842 and the expanded width of the second modified layer 822 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 is also the same.

線狀第1改質層811之間的間隔、線狀第1改質層812之間的間隔、線狀第1改質層831之間的間隔、線狀第1改質層832之間的間隔、線狀第2改質層821之間的間隔、線狀第2改質層822之間的間隔、線狀第2改質層841之間的間隔以及線狀第2改質層842之間的間隔,都只要根據目標半導體晶片的尺寸適當調節即可。 但是,第2實施形態中,如同之前說明,對於進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓8厚度T8 ,理想是設定這些改質層之間的間隔,使半導體晶片的最短一邊的長度在相等以上。The distance between the linear first modified layers 811, the distance between the linear first modified layers 812, the distance between the linear first modified layers 831, the distance between the linear first modified layers 832 interval, the interval between the linear second modified layers 821, the interval between the linear second modified layers 822, the interval between the linear second modified layers 841, and the interval between the linear second modified layers 842 The distance between them can be properly adjusted according to the size of the target semiconductor wafer. However, in the second embodiment, as described above, for the thickness T 8 of the semiconductor wafer 8 when performing the first modifying step and the second modifying step, it is desirable to set the interval between these modified layers so that the semiconductor wafer The lengths of the shortest sides are equal or greater.

根據上述,得到半導體晶圓8,在第1區域80a中,以複數條的線狀第1改質層811以及複數條的線狀第1改質層831形成網目,且以複數條的線狀第1改質層812以及複數條的線狀第1改質層832形成網目,同樣地,第2區域80b中,以複數條的線狀第2改質層821以及複數條的線狀第2改質層841形成網目,且以複數條的線狀第2改質層822以及複數條的線狀第2改質層842形成網目。According to the above, the semiconductor wafer 8 is obtained. In the first region 80a, a plurality of linear first modified layers 811 and a plurality of linear first modified layers 831 form a mesh, and a plurality of linear The first modified layer 812 and the plurality of linear first modified layers 832 form a mesh. Similarly, in the second region 80b, the plurality of linear second modified layers 821 and the plurality of linear second modified layers The modified layer 841 forms a mesh, and the plurality of linear second modified layers 822 and the plurality of linear second modified layers 842 form a mesh.

[第2實施形態中的分割步驟] 第8圖係用以概略說明本發明的第2實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的分割步驟之放大剖面圖。 第2實施形態中的上述分割步驟,如第8(a)圖所示,進行上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟後,研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b。 第2實施形態中的上述分割步驟,作為半導體晶圓8,使用的半導體晶圓代替第1改質層81及第1改質層83,具有第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812及第1改質層832,且代替第2改質層82及第2改質層84,具有第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842之外,與第1實施形態中的分割步驟相同。 第8(a)圖中半導體晶圓8的背面8b,係利用研磨手段6研磨時的面。[Segmentation procedure in the second embodiment] Fig. 8 is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically explaining the dividing step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In the above dividing step in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is ground after the first modifying step and the second modifying step are performed. In the above-mentioned dividing step in the second embodiment, the semiconductor wafer used as the semiconductor wafer 8 has the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 831 instead of the first modified layer 81 and the first modified layer 83 . , the first modified layer 812 and the first modified layer 832, and instead of the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 84, there are a second modified layer 821, a second modified layer 841, a second modified layer Except for the layer 822 and the second modified layer 842, the division procedure in the first embodiment is the same. The back surface 8 b of the semiconductor wafer 8 in FIG. 8( a ) is the surface when it is polished by the polishing means 6 .

第2實施形態中,在此研磨時同時,利用隨著此研磨對半導體晶圓8施加的力,在第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812、第1改質層832、第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842的部位中,分割半導體晶圓8。在此,龜裂89,貫穿第1改質層811、第1改質層812、第2改質層821及第2改質層822形成,貫穿第1改質層831、第1改質層832、第2改質層841及第2改質層842形成(省略圖示)。In the second embodiment, at the same time as this polishing, the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 812, and the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 812, and the first modified layer In the modified layer 832 , the second modified layer 821 , the second modified layer 841 , the second modified layer 822 , and the second modified layer 842 , the semiconductor wafer 8 is divided. Here, the crack 89 is formed through the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 812, the second modified layer 821, and the second modified layer 822, and is formed through the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 832, the second modified layer 841, and the second modified layer 842 are formed (not shown).

這樣,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,半導體晶圓8的研磨面,即研磨時背面8b的位置,透過繼續研磨到達比研磨前半導體晶圓8中的第1改質層811及第1改質層831的位置更半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a側為止,最後,如第8(b)圖所示,全部透過研磨使第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812、第1改質層832、第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842消失,得到複數個半導體晶片8’ 。 這樣的第2實施形態得到的半導體晶片8’及半導體晶圓群8A’,與上述第1實施形態得到之第4(b)圖所示的半導體晶片8’及半導體晶圓群8A’相同。Like this, in the thickness T8 direction of semiconductor wafer 8, the grinding surface of semiconductor wafer 8, namely the position of back surface 8b during grinding, reaches the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 811 and the first in semiconductor wafer 8 before grinding through continuous grinding. 1. The position of the modified layer 831 is further to the circuit formation surface 8a side of the semiconductor wafer 8. Finally, as shown in FIG. 8(b), all the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, The first modified layer 812, the first modified layer 832, the second modified layer 821, the second modified layer 841, the second modified layer 822, and the second modified layer 842 disappear, and a plurality of semiconductor wafers 8' are obtained . The semiconductor wafer 8' and the semiconductor wafer group 8A' obtained in the second embodiment are the same as the semiconductor wafer 8' and the semiconductor wafer group 8A' shown in FIG. 4(b) obtained in the first embodiment.

第8(a)圖中顯示,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,半導體晶圓8的研磨面(研磨時的背面)8b的位置,透過研磨未到達第2改質層822及第2改質層842的位置的階段(換言之,第2改質層822及第2改質層842透過研磨未消失的階段),形成龜裂89的狀態。 但是,這樣的龜裂89狀態是一例。Figure 8(a) shows that in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8, the position of the grinding surface (back surface during grinding) 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 does not reach the second modified layer 822 and the second modified layer 822 through grinding. The state of the position of the modified layer 842 (in other words, the stage where the second modified layer 822 and the second modified layer 842 have not disappeared through polishing) is the state of the crack 89 . However, such a crack 89 state is an example.

第2實施形態中的分割步驟中,形成龜裂89的時期,例如,半導體晶圓8的研磨面(背面) 8b的上述位置,透過研磨重疊在第2改質層821及第2改質層841的位置或第2改質層822及第2改質層842的位置的階段(換言之,第2改質層821及第2改質層841透過研磨消失中的階段,或第2改質層822及第2改質層842透過研磨消失中的階段)也可以; 透過研磨通過第2改質層822及第2改質層842的位置,未到達第2改質層821及第2改質層841的位置的階段(換言之,第2改質層822及第2改質層842透過研磨完成消失,且透過研磨第2改質層821及第2改質層841未消失的階段)也可以; 透過研磨通過第2改質層821及第2改質層841的位置,未到達第1改質層812及第1改質層832的位置的階段(換言之,第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842透過研磨完成消失,且透過研磨第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812及第1改質層832未消失的階段)也可以; 透過研磨重疊在第1改質層812及第1改質層832的位置的階段(換言之,第1改質層812及第1改質層832透過研磨消失中的階段)也可以; 透過研磨通過第1改質層812及第1改質層832的位置,未到達第1改質層811及第1改質層831的位置的階段(換言之,第1改質層812及第1改質層832透過研磨完成消失,且透過研磨第1改質層811及第1改質層831未消失的階段)也可以; 第2實施形態中的龜裂89的狀態,與上述第1實施形態中的龜裂89的狀態相同。In the division step in the second embodiment, when the crack 89 is formed, for example, the above-mentioned position on the polished surface (back surface) 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is superimposed on the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer by polishing. 841 or the stage of the second modified layer 822 and the second modified layer 842 (in other words, the stage where the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 841 are disappearing through grinding, or the second modified layer 822 and the second modified layer 842 are disappearing through grinding) can also be; The stage where the position of the second modified layer 822 and the second modified layer 842 is passed through the grinding, and the position of the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 841 is not reached (in other words, the second modified layer 822 and the second modified layer The modified layer 842 disappears through grinding, and the stage where the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 841 do not disappear through grinding) is also possible; The stage where the position of the first modified layer 812 and the first modified layer 832 is not reached by grinding through the position of the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 841 (in other words, the second modified layer 821, the second modified layer The modified layer 841, the second modified layer 822, and the second modified layer 842 disappear through grinding, and the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 812, and the first modified layer The stage where the stratum layer 832 has not disappeared) can also be; The stage where the first modified layer 812 and the first modified layer 832 are overlapped by grinding (in other words, the stage where the first modified layer 812 and the first modified layer 832 are disappearing through grinding) is also possible; The stage where the position of the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 831 is not reached by grinding through the position of the first modified layer 812 and the first modified layer 832 (in other words, the first modified layer 812 and the first modified layer The modified layer 832 disappears through grinding, and the stage where the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 831 are not disappeared through grinding) is also possible; The state of the crack 89 in the second embodiment is the same as the state of the crack 89 in the above-mentioned first embodiment.

又,第8(b)圖中顯示,直到第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812、第1改質層832、第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842透過研磨全部消失為止,研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b的狀態。在此情況下,得到的半導體晶片8’的內部,這些改質層全部不存在。但是,這樣的研磨面(研磨時的背面) 8b的最後位置,是一例。Also, as shown in Figure 8(b), until the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 812, the first modified layer 832, the second modified layer 821, the second modified layer The rear surface 8 b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is polished until the modified layer 841 , the second modified layer 822 , and the second modified layer 842 are all eliminated by polishing. In this case, none of these modified layers exists in the obtained semiconductor wafer 8'. However, the final position of such a polished surface (back surface during polishing) 8b is an example.

例如,第2實施形態的分割步驟中,也可以透過研磨使第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842消失,且不使第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812及第1改質層832因研磨消失,研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b。在此情況下,得到半導體晶片8’(例如,半導體晶片8’的周緣部)中,至少存在一部分第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812或第1改質層832。 又,也可以透過研磨使第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842、第1改質層812及第1改質層832消失,且不使第1改質層811及第1改質層831因研磨消失,研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b。在此情況下,得到半導體晶片8’(例如,半導體晶片8’的周緣部)中,至少存在一部分第1改質層811或第1改質層831。 但是,這樣任一改質層存在的半導體晶片8’,因為可能機械強度低,在分割步驟中,如第8(b)圖所示,理想是透過研磨直到使第1改質層811及第1改質層831消失為止,研磨半導體晶圓8的背面8b。For example, in the dividing step of the second embodiment, the second modified layer 821, the second modified layer 841, the second modified layer 822, and the second modified layer 842 may also be eliminated by grinding without making the first The modified layer 811 , the first modified layer 831 , the first modified layer 812 , and the first modified layer 832 disappear due to polishing, and the back surface 8 b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is polished. In this case, at least a part of the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 812, or the first modified layer exists in the semiconductor wafer 8' (for example, the peripheral portion of the semiconductor wafer 8'). stratum 832 . In addition, the second modified layer 821, the second modified layer 841, the second modified layer 822, the second modified layer 842, the first modified layer 812, and the first modified layer 832 can also be eliminated by grinding, Furthermore, the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is ground without making the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 831 disappear by grinding. In this case, at least a part of the first modified layer 811 or the first modified layer 831 is present in the semiconductor wafer 8' (for example, the peripheral portion of the semiconductor wafer 8'). However, the semiconductor wafer 8' in which any modified layer exists may have low mechanical strength. In the dividing step, as shown in FIG. 8(b), it is desirable to grind until the first modified layer 811 and the second 1 The back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is ground until the modified layer 831 disappears.

在此,作為第2實施形態,說明關於上述剖面中在連結半導體晶圓的電路形成面及背面的方向形成一列之線狀第1改質層及第2改質層的數量都是2時的半導體晶片的製造方法,但這些改質層的數量還可以不同。Here, as a second embodiment, the case where the number of the linear first modified layer and the number of the second modified layer formed in a row in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface and the rear surface of the semiconductor wafer in the above cross section is described. The manufacturing method of semiconductor wafers, but the number of these modifying layers can also be different.

>第3實施形態> 第9圖係用以概略說明本發明的第3實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之放大剖面圖。 本實施形態,在上述剖面(更具體而言,對半導體晶圓的電路形成面或背面直交的方向中半導體晶圓的剖面)中,連結半導體晶圓的電路形成面及背面的方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層是2且線狀第2改質層數量是1時的半導體晶片的製造方法。>Third Embodiment> Fig. 9 is an enlarged cross-sectional view schematically illustrating the first modifying step and the second modifying step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the third embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, in the above cross section (more specifically, a cross section of the semiconductor wafer in a direction perpendicular to the circuit formation surface or the back surface of the semiconductor wafer), in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface and the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, a A method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer when the number of linear first modified layers in a row is two and the number of linear second modified layers is one.

[第3實施形態中的第1改質步驟] 第3實施形態中的上述第1改質步驟中,如第9(a)圖所示,與第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟相同。 這樣,透過在第1區域80a中形成複數第1改質層,在後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。[The first reforming step in the third embodiment] The above-mentioned first modifying step in the third embodiment is the same as the first modifying step in the second embodiment, as shown in Fig. 9(a). In this way, by forming a plurality of first modified layers in the first region 80a, the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

[第3實施形態中的第2改質步驟] 第3實施形態中的第2改質步驟中,如第9(b)圖所示,除了代替第2改質層821及第2改質層822,形成第2改質層82之外,與第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟相同。 第3實施形態中的第2改質步驟,例如,不形成第2改質層821及第2改質層822任一方,以形成的改質層為第2改質層82之外,可以利用與第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟相同的方法進行。換言之,第3實施形態中的第2改質步驟,作為第2改質層的形成對象半導體晶圓8,代替具有第1改質層81,使用具有第1改質層811及第1改質層812的半導體晶圓之外,可以利用與第1實施形態中的第2改質步驟相同的方法進行。[Second reforming step in the third embodiment] In the second modifying step in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(b), in addition to forming the second modified layer 82 instead of the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822, and The second modification step in the second embodiment is the same. In the second modifying step in the third embodiment, for example, neither the second modified layer 821 nor the second modified layer 822 is formed, and the modified layer to be formed is other than the second modified layer 82. The method is the same as that of the second modifying step in the second embodiment. In other words, in the second modifying step in the third embodiment, instead of having the first modified layer 81, the semiconductor wafer 8 having the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer are used as the semiconductor wafer 8 to be formed with the second modified layer. Except for the semiconductor wafer of the layer 812, it can be performed by the same method as the second modification step in the first embodiment.

第3實施形態中第1改質層812與第2改質層82之間的距離Δ12 ,與第1實施形態中第1改質層81與第2改質層82之間的距離Δ12 相同,其情況達成的效果也與第1實施例的情況相同。 第3實施形態中上述Δ12 ,意味在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中第1改質層812的上端與第2改質層82的下端之間的距離。The distance Δ12 between the first modified layer 812 and the second modified layer 82 in the third embodiment is the same as the distance Δ12 between the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 in the first embodiment Similarly, the effect achieved in this case is also the same as that of the first embodiment. In the third embodiment, the aforementioned Δ 12 means the distance between the upper end of the first modified layer 812 and the lower end of the second modified layer 82 in the thickness T 8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 .

第3實施形態中,像這樣,上述剖面中,在連結半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a及背面8b的方向中形成一列的線狀第1改質層數量是2,線狀第2改質層數量是1。於是,理想是半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層數量是2,線狀第2改質層數量是1。In the third embodiment, in the above cross-section, the number of linear first modified layers formed in a row in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface 8a and the rear surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is two, and the linear second modified layers are two. The number of layers is 1. Therefore, ideally, in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8, the number of linear first modified layers forming a row is two, and the number of linear second modified layers is one.

第3實施形態中,像這樣,在對半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a或背面8b平行的一方向中,一邊錯開位置,一邊遍及半導體晶圓8全區重複進行線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812的形成與線狀第2改質層82的形成(即,重複進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟),藉此,如第9(c)圖所示,分別形成複數條線狀第1改質層811、第1改質層812及第2改質層822。In the third embodiment, in a direction parallel to the circuit formation surface 8a or the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the linear first modifying layer is repeatedly applied over the entire area of the semiconductor wafer 8 while shifting its position. 811 and the formation of the first modification layer 812 and the formation of the linear second modification layer 82 (that is, repeating the first modification step and the second modification step), thereby, as shown in FIG. 9(c) As shown, a plurality of linear first modified layers 811, first modified layers 812, and second modified layers 822 are respectively formed.

第3實施形態中,像這樣,沿著半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a,第1區域80a中形成多數的線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812,沿著半導體晶圓8的背面8b,第2區域80b中形成多數的線狀第2改質層82。結果,得到半導體晶圓8,在第1區域80a中具有1層配置多數的(複數條)線狀第1改質層811及第1改質層812的層,在第2區域80b中具有1層配置多數的(複數條)線狀第2改質層82的層。In the third embodiment, in this way, a large number of linear first modified layers 811 and 812 are formed in the first region 80a along the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8, and along the semiconductor wafer 8 8, a large number of linear second modifying layers 82 are formed in the second region 80b. As a result, a semiconductor wafer 8 is obtained, which has a layer in which a large number of (plural) linear first modified layers 811 and 812 are arranged in one layer in the first region 80a, and has one layer in the second region 80b. A plurality of (plural) linear second modifying layers 82 are arranged in layers.

第3實施形態中,又,如第9(d)圖所示,利用與上述第1改質層811的情況相同的方法在第1區域80a中另外形成多數與上述第1改質層811交叉的線狀第1改質層831,利用與上述第1改質層812的情況相同的方法在第1區域80a中另外形成多數與上述第1改質層812交叉的線狀第1改質層832。又,利用與上述第2改質層82的情況相同的方法在第2區域80b中另外形成多數與上述第2改質層82交叉的線狀第2改質層84。此時,形成第1改質層831後,形成第1改質層832。In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(d), by the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned first modified layer 811, in the first region 80a, a large number of intersecting layers with the above-mentioned first modified layer 811 are additionally formed. In the first region 80a, a large number of linear first modified layers crossing the first modified layer 812 are additionally formed in the first region 80a by the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned first modified layer 812. 832. Also, a large number of linear second modified layers 84 intersecting the second modified layer 82 are separately formed in the second region 80b by the same method as in the case of the second modified layer 82 described above. At this time, after the first modified layer 831 is formed, the first modified layer 832 is formed.

線狀第1改質層811之間的間隔、線狀第1改質層812之間的間隔、線狀第1改質層831之間的間隔、線狀第1改質層832之間的間隔、線狀第2改質層82之間的間隔以及線狀第2改質層84之間的間隔,都只要根據目標半導體晶片的尺寸適當調節即可。 但是,第3實施形態中,如同之前說明,對於進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓8厚度T8 ,理想是設定這些改質層之間的間隔,使半導體晶片的最短一邊的長度在相等以上。The distance between the linear first modified layers 811, the distance between the linear first modified layers 812, the distance between the linear first modified layers 831, the distance between the linear first modified layers 832 The intervals, the intervals between the linear second modified layers 82 and the intervals between the linear second modified layers 84 may be appropriately adjusted according to the size of the target semiconductor wafer. However, in the third embodiment, as described above, for the thickness T8 of the semiconductor wafer 8 when performing the first modifying step and the second modifying step, it is desirable to set the interval between these modified layers so that the semiconductor wafer The lengths of the shortest sides are equal or greater.

根據上述,得到半導體晶圓8,在第1區域80a中,以複數條的線狀第1改質層811以及複數條的線狀第1改質層831形成網目,而且,以複數條的線狀第1改質層812以及複數條的線狀第1改質層832形成網目,同樣地,第2區域80b中,以複數條的線狀第2改質層82以及複數條的線狀第2改質層84形成網目。According to the above, the semiconductor wafer 8 is obtained. In the first region 80a, a plurality of linear first modified layers 811 and a plurality of linear first modified layers 831 form a mesh, and a plurality of linear Shaped first modified layer 812 and a plurality of linear first modified layers 832 form a mesh. Similarly, in the second region 80b, a plurality of linear second modified layers 82 and a plurality of linear first modified layers 2 Modified layer 84 forms a mesh.

[第3實施形態中的分割步驟] 第10圖,係用以概略說明本發明的第3實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的分割步驟之放大剖面圖。 第3實施形態中的分割步驟,如第10(a)圖所示,作為半導體晶圓8,使用的半導體晶圓代替第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822以及第2改質層842,具有第2改質層82及第2改質層84之外,可以利用與第2實施形態中的分割步驟相同的方法進行。換言之,第3實施形態中的分割步驟,作為半導體晶圓8,使用的半導體晶圓代替第1改質層81以及第1改質層83,具有第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812及第1改質層832之外,可以利用與第1實施形態中的分割步驟相同的方法進行。[Segmentation procedure in the third embodiment] Fig. 10 is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically explaining the dividing step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the third embodiment of the present invention. In the division step in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(a), as the semiconductor wafer 8, a semiconductor wafer is used instead of the second modified layer 821, the second modified layer 841, the second modified layer 822 and the second modified layer 842 can be performed by the same method as the division step in the second embodiment except that the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 84 are included. In other words, in the dividing step in the third embodiment, as the semiconductor wafer 8, the semiconductor wafer used instead of the first modified layer 81 and the first modified layer 83 has the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 812, and the first modified layer 832 can be performed by the same method as the division step in the first embodiment.

第3實施形態中,在此研磨時同時,利用隨著此研磨對半導體晶圓8施加的力,在第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812、第1改質層832、第2改質層82及第2改質層84的部位中,分割半導體晶圓8。在此,龜裂89,貫穿第1改質層811、第1改質層812及第2改質層82形成,貫穿第1改質層831、第1改質層832及第2改質層84形成(省略圖示)。In the third embodiment, at the same time as this polishing, the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 812, and the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 812, and the first modified layer In the modified layer 832 , the second modified layer 82 , and the second modified layer 84 , the semiconductor wafer 8 is divided. Here, the crack 89 is formed through the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 812, and the second modified layer 82, and is formed through the first modified layer 831, the first modified layer 832, and the second modified layer. 84 is formed (illustration omitted).

這樣,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,半導體晶圓8的研磨面,即研磨時背面8b的位置,透過繼續研磨到達比研磨前半導體晶圓8中的第1改質層811及第1改質層831的位置更半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a側為止,最後,如第10(b)圖所示,全部透過研磨使第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812、第1改質層832、第2改質層82及第2改質層84消失,得到複數個半導體晶片8’ 。 這樣的第3實施形態得到的半導體晶片8’及半導體晶圓群8A’,與上述第1施形態得到之第4(b)圖所示的半導體晶片8’及半導體晶圓群8A’相同。Like this, in the thickness T8 direction of semiconductor wafer 8, the grinding surface of semiconductor wafer 8, namely the position of back surface 8b during grinding, reaches the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 811 and the first in semiconductor wafer 8 before grinding through continuous grinding. 1. The position of the modified layer 831 is further to the side of the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8. Finally, as shown in FIG. 10(b), all the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, The first modified layer 812, the first modified layer 832, the second modified layer 82, and the second modified layer 84 disappear, and a plurality of semiconductor wafers 8' are obtained. The semiconductor wafer 8' and the semiconductor wafer group 8A' obtained in the third embodiment are the same as the semiconductor wafer 8' and the semiconductor wafer group 8A' shown in FIG. 4(b) obtained in the first embodiment.

與先前說明的第1實施形態及第2實施形態的情況相同,第3實施形態中,形成龜裂89的時期、研磨面(研磨時的背面)8b的最終位置等,也根據目的可以適當調節。As in the case of the first and second embodiments described above, in the third embodiment, the timing of forming the crack 89, the final position of the polishing surface (back surface during polishing) 8b, etc. can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. .

在此,作為第3實施形態,說明關於上述剖面中在連結半導體晶圓的電路形成面及背面的方向形成一列之線狀第1改質層的數量是2且線狀第2改質層的數量是1時的半導體晶片的製造方法,但這些改質層的數量還可以不同。Here, as a third embodiment, a case in which the number of linear first modified layers is two and the linear second modified layer is formed in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface and the rear surface of the semiconductor wafer in the above cross section will be described. The manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer when the number is 1, but the number of these modifying layers can also be different.

>第4實施形態> 第11圖係用以概略說明本發明的第4實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之放大剖面圖。 本實施形態,在上述剖面(更具體而言,對半導體晶圓的電路形成面或背面直交的方向中半導體晶圓的剖面)中,連結半導體晶圓的電路形成面及背面的方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層是1且線狀第2改質層數量是2時的半導體晶片的製造方法。>Fourth Embodiment> Fig. 11 is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically explaining the first modifying step and the second modifying step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, in the above cross section (more specifically, a cross section of the semiconductor wafer in a direction perpendicular to the circuit formation surface or the back surface of the semiconductor wafer), in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface and the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, a A method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer when the number of linear first modified layers in a row is one and the number of linear second modified layers is two.

[第4實施形態中的第1改質步驟] 第4實施形態中的上述第1改質步驟中,如第11(a)圖所示,與第1實施形態中的第1改質步驟相同。換言之,第4實施形態中的第1改質步驟,在第1區域80a中,除了代替形成2條線狀第1改質層(即,第1改質層811及第1改質層812),形成1條線狀第1改質層(即,第1改質層81)之外,與第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟相同。例如,第4實施形態中的第1改質步驟,除了不形成第1改質層811及第1改質層812任一方,而以形成的改質層作為第1改質層81之外,可以利用與第2實施形態中的第1改質步驟相同的方法進行。[The first reforming step in the fourth embodiment] The above-mentioned first modifying step in the fourth embodiment is the same as the first modifying step in the first embodiment, as shown in Fig. 11(a). In other words, in the first modifying step in the fourth embodiment, instead of forming two linear first modified layers (namely, the first modified layer 811 and the first modified layer 812 ) in the first region 80a Except for the formation of one linear first modifying layer (that is, the first modifying layer 81 ), the procedure is the same as that of the first modifying step in the second embodiment. For example, in the first modifying step in the fourth embodiment, neither the first modified layer 811 nor the first modified layer 812 is formed, but the formed modified layer is used as the first modified layer 81, It can be performed by the same method as the first reforming step in the second embodiment.

[第4實施形態中的第2改質步驟] 第4實施形態中的第2改質步驟中,如第11(b)圖所示,作為第2改質層的形成對象半導體晶圓8,代替具有第1改質層811及第1改質層812,使用具有第1改質層81的半導體晶圓之外,可以利用與第2實施形態中的第2改質步驟相同的方法進行。 第2改質層821及第2改質層822都可以利用與第2實施形態相同的方法形成。 這樣,透過在第2區域80b中形成複數第2改質層,在後述的分割步驟中,可以更高精確度地分割半導體晶圓。[Second reforming step in the fourth embodiment] In the second modifying step in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11(b), instead of having the first modified layer 811 and the first modified The layer 812 can be performed by the same method as the second modifying step in the second embodiment, except that the semiconductor wafer having the first modifying layer 81 is used. Both the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 can be formed by the same method as in the second embodiment. In this way, by forming the plurality of second modified layers in the second region 80b, the semiconductor wafer can be divided with higher precision in the dividing step described later.

第4實施形態中第1改質層81與第2改質層821之間的距離Δ12 ,與第1實施形態中第1改質層81與第2改質層82之間的距離Δ12 相同,其情況達成的效果也與第1實施例的情況相同。 第4實施形態中上述Δ12 ,意味在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中第1改質層81的上端與第2改質層821的下端之間的距離。The distance Δ12 between the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 821 in the fourth embodiment is the same as the distance Δ12 between the first modified layer 81 and the second modified layer 82 in the first embodiment Similarly, the effect achieved in this case is also the same as that of the first embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the aforementioned Δ 12 means the distance between the upper end of the first modified layer 81 and the lower end of the second modified layer 821 in the thickness T 8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8 .

第4實施形態中,像這樣,上述剖面中,在連結半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a及背面8b的方向中形成一列的線狀第1改質層數量是1,線狀第2改質層數量是2。於是,理想是半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,形成一列的線狀第1改質層數量是1,線狀第2改質層數量是2。In the fourth embodiment, in the above cross-section, the number of linear first modified layers formed in a row in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface 8a and the rear surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8 is one, and the linear second modified layer is one. The number of layers is 2. Therefore, ideally, in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8, the number of linear first modified layers forming a row is one, and the number of linear second modified layers is two.

第4實施形態中,像這樣,在對半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a或背面8b平行的一方向中,一邊錯開位置,一邊遍及半導體晶圓8全區重複進行線狀第1改質層81的形成與線狀第2改質層821及822的形成(即,重複進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟),藉此,如第11(c)圖所示,分別形成複數條線狀第1改質層81、第2改質層821及第2改質層822。In the fourth embodiment, in this way, in a direction parallel to the circuit formation surface 8a or the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the linear first modifying layer is repeatedly formed over the entire area of the semiconductor wafer 8 while shifting its position. 81 and the formation of linear second modifying layers 821 and 822 (that is, repeating the first modifying step and the second modifying step), whereby, as shown in FIG. 11(c), plural The strip-shaped first modified layer 81 , the second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 .

第4實施形態中,像這樣,沿著半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a,第1區域80a中形成多數的線狀第1改質層81,沿著半導體晶圓8的背面8b,第2區域80b中形成多數的線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822。結果,得到半導體晶圓8,在第1區域80a中具有1層配置多數的(複數條)線狀第1改質層81的層,在第2區域80b中具有1層配置多數的(複數條)線狀第2改質層821及第2改質層822的層。In the fourth embodiment, like this, along the circuit formation surface 8a of the semiconductor wafer 8, a large number of linear first modified layers 81 are formed in the first region 80a, and along the back surface 8b of the semiconductor wafer 8, the second A large number of linear second modified layers 821 and 822 are formed in the region 80b. As a result, a semiconductor wafer 8 is obtained, which has a single-layer arrangement of a plurality of (plural) linear first modifying layers 81 in the first region 80a, and has a single-layer arrangement of a plurality of (plural) linear first modifying layers 81 in the second region 80b. ) The layers of the linear second modified layer 821 and the second modified layer 822 .

第4實施形態中,又,如第11(d)圖所示,利用與上述第1改質層81的情況相同的方法在第1區域80a中另外形成多數與上述第1改質層81交叉的線狀第1改質層83。又,利用與上述第2改質層821的情況相同的方法在第2區域80b中另外形成多數與上述第2改質層821交叉的線狀第2改質層841,利用與上述第2改質層822的情況相同的方法在第2區域80b中另外形成多數與上述第2改質層822交叉的線狀第2改質層842。此時,形成第2改質層841後,形成第2改質層842。In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11(d), by the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned first modified layer 81, in the first region 80a, a large number of layers intersecting with the above-mentioned first modified layer 81 are additionally formed. linear first modifying layer 83 . In addition, a large number of linear second modified layers 841 intersecting the second modified layer 821 are separately formed in the second region 80b by the same method as in the case of the second modified layer 821 described above. In the same manner as in the case of the modified layer 822, a large number of linear second modified layers 842 intersecting the above-mentioned second modified layer 822 are separately formed in the second region 80b. At this time, after the second modified layer 841 is formed, the second modified layer 842 is formed.

線狀第1改質層81之間的間隔、線狀第1改質層83之間的間隔、線狀第2改質層821之間的間隔、線狀第2改質層822之間的間隔、線狀第2改質層841之間的間隔以及線狀第2改質層842之間的間隔,都只要根據目標半導體晶片的尺寸適當調節即可。 但是,第4實施形態中,如同之前說明,對於進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓8厚度T8 ,理想是設定這些改質層之間的間隔,使半導體晶片的最短一邊的長度在相等以上。The distance between the linear first modified layers 81, the distance between the linear first modified layers 83, the distance between the linear second modified layers 821, and the distance between the linear second modified layers 822 The intervals, the intervals between the linear second modified layers 841 and the intervals between the linear second modified layers 842 may be appropriately adjusted according to the size of the target semiconductor wafer. However, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, for the thickness T 8 of the semiconductor wafer 8 when the first modifying step and the second modifying step are performed, it is desirable to set the interval between these modified layers so that the semiconductor wafer The lengths of the shortest sides are equal or greater.

根據上述,得到半導體晶圓8,在第1區域80a中,以複數條的線狀第1改質層81以及複數條的線狀第1改質層83形成網目,同樣地,第2區域80b中,以複數條的線狀第2改質層821以及複數條的線狀第2改質層841形成網目,而且以複數條的線狀第2改質層822以及複數條的線狀第2改質層842形成網目。According to the above, the semiconductor wafer 8 is obtained. In the first region 80a, a plurality of linear first modified layers 81 and a plurality of linear first modified layers 83 form a mesh. Similarly, the second region 80b Among them, a plurality of linear second modified layers 821 and a plurality of linear second modified layers 841 form a mesh, and a plurality of linear second modified layers 822 and a plurality of linear second modified layers Modified layer 842 forms a mesh.

[第4實施形態中的分割步驟] 第12圖,係用以概略說明本發明的第4實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的分割步驟之放大剖面圖。 第4實施形態中的分割步驟,如第12(a)圖所示,例如,作為半導體晶圓8,使用的半導體晶圓代替第1改質層811、第1改質層831、第1改質層812以及第1改質層832,具有第1改質層81及第1改質層83之外,可以利用與第2實施形態中的分割步驟相同的方法進行。換言之,第4實施形態中的分割步驟,使用的半導體晶圓,代替具有第2改質層82以及第2改質層84,具有第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842之外,可以利用與第1實施形態中的分割步驟相同的方法進行。[Segmentation procedure in the fourth embodiment] Fig. 12 is an enlarged cross-sectional view schematically illustrating a division step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The division step in the fourth embodiment is as shown in FIG. 12(a). For example, as the semiconductor wafer 8, a semiconductor wafer is used instead of the first modified layer 811, the first modified layer 831, and the first modified layer. Except for the modified layer 812 and the first modified layer 832 having the first modified layer 81 and the first modified layer 83, it can be performed by the same method as the division step in the second embodiment. In other words, in the dividing step in the fourth embodiment, instead of having the second modified layer 82 and the second modified layer 84, the semiconductor wafer used has the second modified layer 821, the second modified layer 841, the second modified layer Except for the modified layer 822 and the second modified layer 842, it can be performed by the same method as the division step in the first embodiment.

第4實施形態中,在此研磨時同時,利用隨著此研磨對半導體晶圓8施加的力,在第1改質層81、第1改質層83、第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842的部位中,分割半導體晶圓8。在此,龜裂89,貫穿第1改質層81、第2改質層821及第2改質層822形成,貫穿第1改質層83、第2改質層841及第2改質層842形成(省略圖示)。In the fourth embodiment, at the time of polishing, the first modified layer 81, the first modified layer 83, the second modified layer 821, the second modified layer In the modified layer 841 , the second modified layer 822 , and the second modified layer 842 , the semiconductor wafer 8 is divided. Here, the crack 89 is formed through the first modified layer 81, the second modified layer 821, and the second modified layer 822, and is formed through the first modified layer 83, the second modified layer 841, and the second modified layer. 842 is formed (illustration omitted).

這樣,半導體晶圓8的厚度T8 方向中,半導體晶圓8的研磨面,即研磨時背面8b的位置,透過繼續研磨到達比研磨前半導體晶圓8中的第1改質層81及第1改質層83的位置更半導體晶圓8的電路形成面8a側為止,最後,如第12(b)圖所示,全部透過研磨使第1改質層81、第1改質層83、第2改質層821、第2改質層841、第2改質層822及第2改質層842消失,得到複數個半導體晶片8’ 。 這樣的第4實施形態得到的半導體晶片8’及半導體晶圓群8A’,與上述第1實施形態得到之第4(b)圖所示的半導體晶片8’及半導體晶圓群8A’相同。Like this, in the thickness T8 direction of semiconductor wafer 8, the grinding surface of semiconductor wafer 8, namely the position of back surface 8b during grinding, reaches the first modified layer 81 and the first modified layer 81 and the first in semiconductor wafer 8 before grinding by continuing grinding. 1. The position of the modified layer 83 is further to the circuit formation surface 8a side of the semiconductor wafer 8. Finally, as shown in FIG. 12(b), all the first modified layer 81, the first modified layer 83, The second modified layer 821, the second modified layer 841, the second modified layer 822 and the second modified layer 842 disappear, and a plurality of semiconductor wafers 8' are obtained. The semiconductor wafer 8' and semiconductor wafer group 8A' obtained in the fourth embodiment are the same as the semiconductor wafer 8' and semiconductor wafer group 8A' shown in FIG. 4(b) obtained in the first embodiment.

與先前說明的第1實施形態及第2實施形態的情況相同,第4實施形態中,形成龜裂89的時期、研磨面(研磨時的背面)8b的最終位置等,也根據目的可以適當調節。As in the case of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of forming the crack 89, the final position of the polishing surface (the back surface during polishing) 8b, etc. can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. .

在此,作為第4實施形態,說明關於上述剖面中在連結半導體晶圓的電路形成面及背面的方向形成一列之線狀第1改質層的數量是1且線狀第2改質層的數量是2時的半導體晶片的製造方法,但這些改質層的數量還可以不同。Here, as a fourth embodiment, a case in which the number of the linear first modified layer is one and the linear second modified layer is formed in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface and the rear surface of the semiconductor wafer in the above cross section will be described. The manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer when the number is 2, but the number of these modifying layers can also be different.

本實施形態的半導體晶片的製造方法,不限於上述第1〜4實施形態。例如,本實施形態的半導體晶片的製造方法,在不損害本發明效果的範圍內,變更或削除第1〜4實施形態中的一部分構成或對第1〜4實施形態再追加其它構成也可以。The method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer according to this embodiment is not limited to the first to fourth embodiments described above. For example, in the method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer according to this embodiment, within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention, some configurations in the first to fourth embodiments may be changed or deleted, or other configurations may be added to the first to fourth embodiments.

例如,第1〜4實施形態中,作為半導體晶圓,使用其內部的第1區域與第2區域互相離間的半導體晶圓,但上述製造方法中,使用第1區域的一部分與第2區域的一部分重複的半導體晶圓也可以。根據實行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓厚度,像這樣,半導體晶圓內部,能存在第1區域而且也是第2區域的區域,上述製造方法中,即使如此情況下,也只要在比半導體晶圓中的第1改質層更背面側之處,形成第2改質層即可。For example, in the first to fourth embodiments, a semiconductor wafer in which the first region and the second region are separated from each other is used as the semiconductor wafer, but in the above-mentioned manufacturing method, a part of the first region and a part of the second region are used A portion of duplicated semiconductor wafers is also possible. Depending on the thickness of the semiconductor wafer when the first modifying step and the second modifying step are carried out, as such, the first region and the second region can exist inside the semiconductor wafer. In the above-mentioned manufacturing method, even in this case , as long as the second modified layer is formed on the back side of the first modified layer in the semiconductor wafer.

又,第1〜4實施形態中,說明關於上述剖面中連結半導體晶圓的電路形成面及背面的方向中,行成一列的線狀第1改質層數量是1或2,且線狀第2改質層數量是1或2情況下的半導體晶片的製造方法。這樣形成一列的線狀第1改質層數量及線狀第2改質層數量都是3以上也可以。但是,更簡化上述半導體晶片的製造方法且充分得到本發明的效果方面,理想是這些改質層數量都是1或2。In addition, in the first to fourth embodiments, in the direction connecting the circuit formation surface and the back surface of the semiconductor wafer in the above cross-section, the number of linear first modifying layers in a row is 1 or 2, and the linear first modifying layers are 2 A method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer when the number of modifying layers is 1 or 2. In this way, both the number of linear first modified layers and the number of linear second modified layers forming a row may be three or more. However, it is desirable that the number of these modifying layers is all one or two in order to simplify the manufacturing method of the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer and fully obtain the effect of the present invention.

本實施形態中,透過實行目前為止說明的第1改質步驟、第2改質步驟及分割步驟,如同先前的說明,得到複數個上述半導體晶片排列狀態的半導體晶片群。本實施形態中,從上述半導體晶片群得到目標半導體晶片。In this embodiment, by performing the first modifying step, the second modifying step, and the dividing step described so far, as described above, a plurality of semiconductor wafer groups in the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer arrangement state are obtained. In this embodiment, a target semiconductor wafer is obtained from the semiconductor wafer group described above.

>>半導體裝置的製造方法>> 根據上述半導體晶片的製造方法,得到半導體晶片群後,使用此半導體晶片群,可以製造半導體裝置。 即,本發明一實施形態的半導體裝置的製造方法,根據上述半導體晶片的製造方法,得到複數個半導體晶片排列狀態的半導體晶片群後,包括積層步驟,使用包括支撐片以及上述支撐片上形成的膜狀接合劑之黏晶片,透過黏貼上述黏晶片中的上述膜狀接合劑至上述半導體晶片群中的半導體晶片研磨後的上述背面,製作上述半導體晶片群與上述黏晶片的積層物;以及拾起步驟,對於上述積層物,透過從其支撐片側施力,沿著上述半導體晶片切斷上述積層物中的上述膜狀接合劑,將背面備置切斷後的上述膜狀接合劑的上述半導體晶片,從上述支撐片拉開拾起。>>Manufacturing method of semiconductor device>> According to the above method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer, after obtaining a semiconductor wafer group, a semiconductor device can be manufactured using this semiconductor wafer group. That is, the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an embodiment of the present invention is based on the above-mentioned method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer. After obtaining a semiconductor wafer group in which a plurality of semiconductor wafers are arranged, a stacking step is included, using a support sheet and a film formed on the support sheet. Wafer bonding agent, by sticking the above-mentioned film-like bonding agent in the above-mentioned bonding wafer to the above-mentioned back surface of the semiconductor wafer in the above-mentioned semiconductor chip group after grinding, the laminate of the above-mentioned semiconductor chip group and the above-mentioned bonding chip is produced; and picking up The step is to cut the above-mentioned film-like bonding agent in the above-mentioned laminated product along the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer by applying a force from the side of the support sheet to the above-mentioned laminate, and prepare the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer with the cut-off film-like bonding agent on the back, from The above-mentioned supporting sheet is pulled apart and picked up.

第13圖係用以概略說明本發明的一實施形態的半導體裝置的製造方法中的上述積層步驟及拾起步驟之放大剖面圖。Fig. 13 is an enlarged cross-sectional view schematically illustrating the above-mentioned stacking step and pick-up step in the method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

[積層步驟] 本實施形態中的上述積層步驟中,如第13(a)圖所示,使用包括支撐片10以及支撐片10上形成的膜狀接合劑13之黏晶片101。支撐片10構成為包括基材11以及在基材11上形成的黏合劑層12,黏合劑層12在與基材11相反側的面12a上,設置膜狀接合劑13。即,基材11、黏合劑層12及膜狀接合劑13依此順序在這些厚度方向中積層,構成黏晶片101。[Stacking steps] In the above lamination step in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13( a ), a die attach 101 including a support sheet 10 and a film-like adhesive 13 formed on the support sheet 10 is used. The support sheet 10 includes a base material 11 and an adhesive layer 12 formed on the base material 11 . The adhesive layer 12 is provided with a film-like adhesive 13 on a surface 12 a opposite to the base material 11 . That is, the substrate 11 , the adhesive layer 12 , and the film-like bonding agent 13 are laminated in this order in these thickness directions to form the bonded die 101 .

黏晶片101,可以是眾所周知的。 膜狀接合劑13,如後述,接合固定半導體晶片8’至基板的電路面或另外的半導體晶片上,使用於晶片接合。利用上述製造方法切斷,且具有熱硬化性的膜狀接合劑13(即,具有熱硬化性的膜狀接合劑13’),在使用備置此的半導體晶片8’製造的半導體裝置中,成為硬化物。 黏合劑層12,調節支撐片10與膜狀接合劑13之間的接合力。The die bonding 101 can be well known. The film bonding agent 13 is used for die bonding by bonding and fixing the semiconductor chip 8' to the circuit surface of the substrate or another semiconductor chip as will be described later. The thermosetting film-like bonding agent 13 (that is, the thermosetting film-like bonding agent 13') which is cut by the above-mentioned manufacturing method becomes Hardened. The adhesive layer 12 adjusts the bonding force between the support sheet 10 and the film adhesive 13 .

上述積層步驟中,根據先前說明的半導體晶片的製造方法,得到複數個半導體晶片8’排列狀態的半導體晶片群8A’後,利用黏晶片101,透過黏貼黏晶片101中的膜狀接合劑13至半導體晶片群8A’中的半導體晶片8’研磨後的背面8b’,製作半導體晶片群8A’與黏晶片101的積層物801。 此時通常,黏貼1枚黏晶片101至半導體晶片群8A’全體。 又,本說明書中,只要不特別聲明,僅僅「積層物」的記載,意味在此所示的「半導體晶片群與黏晶片的積層物」。In the above lamination step, according to the semiconductor wafer manufacturing method described above, after obtaining the semiconductor wafer group 8A' in which a plurality of semiconductor wafers 8' are arranged, the adhesive wafer 101 is used to stick the film-like adhesive 13 in the adhesive wafer 101 to the The back surface 8b' of the semiconductor wafer 8' in the semiconductor wafer group 8A' after grinding is used to produce a laminate 801 of the semiconductor wafer group 8A' and the bonded wafer 101. At this time, usually, one sticky wafer 101 is attached to the entire semiconductor wafer group 8A'. In addition, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, only the description of "laminated product" means "a laminated product of a semiconductor wafer group and a bonded wafer" shown here.

在此,作為黏晶片,顯示包括基材11、黏合劑層12及膜狀接合劑13,這樣的黏晶片,可以用作黏晶切割片(dicing die bonding sheet)。於是,本實施形態中,使用其它眾所周知的黏晶片也可以。 作為其它黏晶片,例如,黏晶片101中省略黏合劑層12;除了基材11、黏合劑層12及膜狀接合劑13以外,在這些中任2層間還包括中間層的黏晶片等。Here, as the die bonding, it is shown that the substrate 11 , the adhesive layer 12 and the film bonding agent 13 are included. Such a die bonding can be used as a dicing die bonding sheet. Therefore, in this embodiment, other well-known bonded dies may be used. As other die bonding, for example, the die bonding 101 omits the adhesive layer 12; in addition to the substrate 11, the adhesive layer 12, and the film bonding agent 13, an intermediate layer of die bonding is included between any two of these layers.

先前說明的半導體晶片的製造方法中,直到上述分割步驟為止使用保護膜7時,本實施形態中,如第13(b)圖所示,從半導體晶片8’除去保護膜7。 又,本說明書中,不論有無保護膜,複數個半導體晶片在排列狀態中稱作「半導體晶片群」。In the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer described above, when the protective film 7 was used up to the above-mentioned dividing step, in this embodiment, the protective film 7 is removed from the semiconductor wafer 8' as shown in FIG. 13(b). In addition, in this specification, regardless of the presence or absence of a protective film, a plurality of semiconductor wafers are referred to as a "semiconductor wafer group" in an arrayed state.

[拾起步驟] 本實施形態中的上述拾起步驟,如第13(c)圖所示,對於上述積層物801,透過從其支撐片10側施力,沿著半導體晶片8’的外周80’切斷積層物801中的膜狀接合劑13,將背面8b’備置切斷後的膜狀接合劑13’的半導體晶片8’,從支撐片10拉開拾起。 在此,膜狀接合劑中,與半導體晶片8’一起只有拾起的部位,附上符號13’,剩下部位的符號維持13。 又,本說明書中,像這樣,背面備置切斷後的膜狀接合劑之半導體晶片有時概述為「附膜狀接合劑的半導體晶片」。[Pick up steps] In the above-mentioned pick-up step in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13(c), for the above-mentioned laminate 801, by applying force from the support sheet 10 side, the laminate is cut along the outer periphery 80' of the semiconductor wafer 8'. For the film bonding agent 13 in 801 , the semiconductor wafer 8 ′ with the cut film bonding agent 13 ′ on the back surface 8 b ′ is pulled away from the support sheet 10 and picked up. Here, in the film bonding agent, only the picked-up portion together with the semiconductor wafer 8' is given the symbol 13', and the symbol 13 is maintained for the rest of the portion. In addition, in this specification, the semiconductor wafer provided with the cut|disconnected film-form bonding agent on the back surface may be summed up as "semiconductor wafer with film-form bonding agent attached like this".

拾起步驟,可以利用眾所周知的方法實行。 拾起步驟中,例如,作為半導體晶片的拾起手段,使用包括對於拾起對象物用以施力的頂起部以及用以從支撐片拉開半導體晶片的拉起部之手段。The pick-up step can be performed by a well-known method. In the pick-up step, for example, as a pick-up means for a semiconductor wafer, a means including a push-up portion for urging an object to be picked up and a pull-up portion for pulling the semiconductor wafer away from the support sheet is used.

在此所示的拾起手段,作為上述頂起部,包括1個突起(接腳)51,作為上述拉起部,包括真空夾頭52。 於是,在此,顯示的範例,在上述拾起手段中,突出突起51,由於突起51前端部從其基材11側頂起黏晶片101,對於積層物801,往突起51的突出方向P1 施力,又,由於拉起真空夾頭52,將吸附的半導體晶片8’隨著膜狀接合劑13’,往真空夾頭52的拉起方向P2 從支撐片10拉開。此時,突起51的突出量(頂起量)、突出速度(頂起速度)、突出狀態保持時間(頂起保持時間)等頂起條件以及真空夾頭52的拉起速度等拉起條件,都可以適當調節。 又,第13圖中,只剖面顯示積層物801。The pick-up means shown here includes a protrusion (leg) 51 as the above-mentioned lifting part, and a vacuum chuck 52 as the above-mentioned pulling-up part. Therefore, here, in the example shown, in the above-mentioned pick-up means, the protruding protrusion 51, since the front end of the protrusion 51 pushes up the bonded wafer 101 from the substrate 11 side, for the laminate 801, the protruding direction P 1 of the protrusion 51 Applying force, and pulling up the vacuum chuck 52, the adsorbed semiconductor wafer 8' is pulled away from the support sheet 10 in the pulling direction P2 of the vacuum chuck 52 along with the film bonding agent 13'. At this time, the protrusion amount (jacking amount) of the protrusion 51, the protrusion speed (jacking speed), the protrusion state retention time (jacking retention time) and other jacking conditions and the pulling-up conditions such as the pulling-up speed of the vacuum chuck 52, can be adjusted appropriately. In Fig. 13, only the laminate 801 is shown in cross section.

拾起步驟中,膜狀接合劑13的切斷結束後,從支撐片10拉開包括此切斷後的膜狀接合劑13’的半導體晶片8’也可以,膜狀接合劑13的切斷結束前,從支撐片10拉開包括此切斷中的膜狀接合劑13d 半導體晶片8’,此拉開後膜狀接合劑13的切斷結束也可以,膜狀接合劑13的切斷結束時機與半導體晶片8’的拉開時機之順序,不特別限定。這些時機順序,透過調節上述頂起條件及拉起條件等拾起條件或者膜狀接合劑13的特性,可以適當調節。In the pick-up step, after the cutting of the film bonding agent 13 is completed, the semiconductor wafer 8' including the cut film bonding agent 13' may be pulled from the support sheet 10, and the cutting of the film bonding agent 13 is completed. Before pulling away from the support sheet 10 the semiconductor wafer 8' including the film bonding agent 13d being cut, the cutting of the film bonding agent 13 may be completed after this pulling, and the timing of cutting the film bonding agent 13 is The sequence of timings for detaching from the semiconductor wafer 8' is not particularly limited. These timing sequences can be appropriately adjusted by adjusting the pick-up conditions such as the above-mentioned jacking conditions and pull-up conditions, or the characteristics of the film adhesive 13 .

在此,對積層物801施力,圖示的突起51是1個,但本實施形態中,突起51數量不特別限定,2個以上也可以,只要適當選擇即可。Here, one projection 51 is shown to apply force to the laminate 801 , but in this embodiment, the number of projections 51 is not particularly limited, and may be two or more, as long as it is appropriately selected.

在此,作為對積層物801施力的方法,說明關於透過使突起構成的頂起部突出施力的方法,但利用其它的方法施力也可以。作為這樣的其它方法,例如,使用具有傾斜面的滑軌構成的頂起部,一邊使其上述傾除面接觸支撐片10中的基材11表面,一邊沿著基材11表面移動,藉此施力的方法等其它眾所周知的方法。Here, as a method of applying a force to the laminate 801, a method of applying a force by protruding through a protruding portion constituted by a protrusion will be described, but the force may be applied by another method. As such another method, for example, use a jacking portion composed of a slide rail with an inclined surface, move along the surface of the base material 11 while making the above-mentioned dumping surface contact the surface of the base material 11 in the support sheet 10, thereby The method of applying force and other well-known methods.

在此,說明關於上述拾起步驟中,製作積層物801後,對於維持原狀態的積層物801,透過從支撐片10側施力,切斷積層物801中的膜狀接合劑13,拾起包括此切斷後的膜狀接合劑13’之半導體晶片8’的情況。此方法(以下,有時稱作「拾起方法(1)」)的步驟數少,因為可以在常溫下進行,簡化步驟方面是有利的,又,此方法(「拾起方法(1)」)適於尺寸小的半導體晶片製造,對於繼續適於同樣尺寸小的半導體晶片製造之上述第1改質步驟到分割步驟的各步驟進行特別適合。Here, in the above-mentioned picking-up step, after the laminated product 801 is produced, the film-like adhesive 13 in the laminated product 801 is cut by applying force from the side of the support sheet 10 to the laminated product 801 maintained in its original state, and then picked up. The case of the semiconductor wafer 8' including the cut film bonding agent 13'. This method (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "pick-up method (1)") has a small number of steps because it can be carried out at room temperature, which is advantageous in terms of simplification of steps. Again, this method ("pick-up method (1)") ) is suitable for the manufacture of small semiconductor wafers, and is particularly suitable for carrying out the steps from the above-mentioned first modification step to the division step which continue to be suitable for the manufacture of small semiconductor wafers of the same size.

另一方面,上述拾起步驟中,採用上述拾起方法(1)以外的方法也可以。例如,製作積層物801後,對於維持原狀態的積層物801,不是從支撐片10側施力,首先,將冷卻的積層物801,在對其中的黏晶片101表面平行的方向中擴展(拉長)。藉此,擴大半導體晶片8’間的距離的同時,沿著半導體晶片8’的外周80’切斷積層物801中的膜狀接合劑13,製作背面8b’備置切斷後的膜狀接合劑13’的半導體晶片8’。接著,在此擴展並切斷膜狀接合劑13狀態的積層物801中,加熱處理不配置半導體晶片8’的黏晶片101周緣部近旁。接著,對於此加熱處理後的積層物801,利用與上述拾起方法(1)的情況相同的方法,透過從其支撐片10側施力,從支撐片10拉開背面8b’備置切斷後的膜狀接合劑13’的半導體晶片8’(已經製作完成的附膜狀接合劑半導體晶片)再拾起。此方法(以下,有時稱作「拾起方法(2)」)中,可以使用廣泛種類的黏晶片101。其反面,此方法(「拾起方法(2)」),另外需要以切斷膜狀接合劑為主要目的的步驟,步驟數多,也需要冷卻積層物,因為煩雜,不能說最適於尺寸小的半導體晶片製造。 因此,本實施形態中,在拾起步驟中,不是拾起方法(2),理想是採用拾起方法(1)。On the other hand, in the above-mentioned picking-up step, methods other than the above-mentioned picking-up method (1) may be used. For example, after fabricating the laminate 801, instead of applying force from the side of the support sheet 10 to the laminate 801 maintained in its original state, first, the cooled laminate 801 is expanded (pulled) in a direction parallel to the surface of the bonded wafer 101 therein. long). In this way, while increasing the distance between the semiconductor wafers 8', the film-like bonding agent 13 in the laminate 801 is cut along the outer periphery 80' of the semiconductor wafer 8', and the cut film-like bonding agent 13 is prepared on the rear surface 8b'. 'The semiconductor wafer 8'. Next, in the laminated product 801 in the state where the film adhesive 13 is expanded and cut, the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the bonded wafer 101 where the semiconductor wafer 8' is not disposed is heat-treated. Next, for this heat-treated laminate 801, use the same method as the case of the above-mentioned pick-up method (1), by applying force from the support sheet 10 side, pull the back surface 8b' from the support sheet 10 to prepare the cut. The semiconductor wafer 8' of the film bonding agent 13' (the already produced semiconductor wafer with the film bonding agent) is picked up again. In this method (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "pickup method (2)"), a wide variety of bonded die 101 can be used. On the other hand, this method ("pick-up method (2)") requires an additional step whose main purpose is to cut off the film-like adhesive. The number of steps is large, and it is also necessary to cool the laminate. It is complicated and cannot be said to be the most suitable for small sizes. semiconductor wafer manufacturing. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the picking-up step, instead of the picking-up method (2), it is desirable to use the picking-up method (1).

本實施形態的半導體裝置的製造方法中,使用以上述拾起步驟得到的附膜狀接合劑半導體晶片,這之後利用眾所周知的方法,可以製造半導體裝置。 例如,上述附膜狀接合劑半導體晶片,以其膜狀接合劑晶片接合至基板電路面,根據需要,此半導體晶片再積層1個以上半導體晶片,實行打線接合後,由於得到的半導體晶片全體以樹脂密封,可以製造半導體封裝。於是,使用此半導體封裝,可以製造目標半導體裝置。In the method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, a semiconductor device can be manufactured by using the semiconductor wafer with a film-like bonding agent obtained in the above-mentioned pick-up step, and thereafter by a well-known method. For example, the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer with film-like bonding agent is wafer-bonded to the circuit surface of the substrate with its film-like bonding agent. If necessary, this semiconductor wafer is laminated with one or more semiconductor wafers. Resin sealing, semiconductor package can be manufactured. Thus, using this semiconductor package, a target semiconductor device can be manufactured.

◎黏晶片 其次,更詳細說明關於上述積層步驟及拾起步驟中適於使用的黏晶片101等黏晶片。◎Stick chip Next, the above-mentioned bonding chip 101 suitable for use in the lamination step and the picking step will be described in more detail.

○基材 構成上述黏晶片中的支撐片之上述基材(例如,構成黏晶片101中支撐片10的基材11,係片狀或膜狀,作為其構成材料,例如各種樹脂。○Substrate The above-mentioned base material constituting the support sheet in the above-mentioned bonded wafer (for example, the base material 11 constituting the support sheet 10 in the bonded chip 101 ) is in the form of a sheet or a film, and its constituent materials are, for example, various resins.

作為上述樹脂,例如,聚乙烯(polyethylene)、聚丙烯(polypropylene)、聚丁烯(polybutene)、聚丁二烯(polybutadiene)、聚甲基戊烯( polymethylpentene)、降冰片烯(norbornene)樹脂等聚稀烴(polyolefin);乙烯/醋酸乙烯酯共聚物(ethylene/vinyl acetate copolymer)、乙烯-甲基丙烯酸共聚物(ethylene methacrylic acid copolymer)、乙烯-甲基丙烯酸酯共聚物(ethylene methacrylic acid ester copolymer)、乙烯降冰片烯(ethylene norbornene)共聚物等乙烯基共聚物(ethylene based copolymer)(使用乙烯作為單體得到的共聚物);聚氯乙稀(polyvinylchloride)、二氯乙烯共聚物等氯乙烯基樹脂(使用氯乙烯作為單體得到的樹脂);聚苯乙烯(polystyrene);聚環烯(polycycloolefin);聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯(polyethylene terephthalate)、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯(polyethylene naphthalate)、聚對苯二甲酸丁二酯( polybutylene terephthalate)、聚間苯二甲酸乙二酯(polyethylene isophthalate)、聚2,6-萘二甲酸乙二醇酯(POLYETHYLENE 2,6-NAPHTHALENEDICARBOXYLATE ),全部的構成單位具有芳香族環式基的全芳香族聚酯(polyester)等聚酯;2種以上的上述聚酯共聚物;聚甲基丙烯酸酯;聚氨酯(polyurethane);聚氨基丙烯酸酯(polyurethane acrylate);聚醯亞胺(polyimide);聚醯胺(polyamide);聚碳酸酯(polycarbonate);氟樹脂;聚縮醛(polyacetal);改性聚氧二甲苯 (modified polyphenylene oxide);聚苯硫醚(Polyphenylenesulfide);聚碸(polysulfone);聚醚酮 (Polyetherketone)等。 又,作為上述樹脂,例如,還有上述聚酯(polyester) 與除此以外的樹脂的混合物等聚合物合金。 又,作為上述樹脂,例如,還有目前為止例示的1種或2種以上上述樹脂交聯的交聯樹脂;例如使用目前為止例示的1種或2種以上上述樹脂的離子聚合物(ionomer)等改性樹脂。As the resin, for example, polyethylene (polyethylene), polypropylene (polypropylene), polybutene (polybutene), polybutadiene (polybutadiene), polymethylpentene (polymethylpentene), norbornene (norbornene) resin, etc. Polyolefin; ethylene/vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene methacrylic acid copolymer, ethylene methacrylic acid ester copolymer ), ethylene based copolymer (copolymer obtained by using ethylene as a monomer) such as ethylene norbornene copolymer; vinyl chloride such as polyvinylchloride and ethylene dichloride copolymer base resin (resin obtained by using vinyl chloride as a monomer); polystyrene; polycycloolefin; polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate naphthalate), polybutylene terephthalate (polybutylene terephthalate), polyethylene isophthalate (polyethylene isophthalate), polyethylene 2,6-naphthalate (POLYETHYLENE 2,6-NAPHTHALENEDICARBOXYLATE), Polyesters such as wholly aromatic polyesters having aromatic ring groups in all of their constituent units; copolymers of two or more of the above-mentioned polyesters; polymethacrylates; polyurethanes; polyurethanes acrylate); polyimide; polyamide; polycarbonate; fluororesin; polyacetal; modified polyphenylene oxide; polyphenylene sulfide Ether (Polyphenylenesulfide); Polysulfone (polysulfone); Polyetherketone (Polyetherketone), etc. Moreover, as said resin, there exist polymer alloys, such as a mixture of the said polyester (polyester) and other resin, for example. Also, as the above-mentioned resin, for example, there is also a cross-linked resin in which one or more of the above-mentioned resins exemplified so far are cross-linked; for example, an ionomer (ionomer) using one or more of the above-mentioned resins exemplified so far and other modified resins.

構成基材的樹脂,只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The resin constituting the base material may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

基材是1層(單層)構成也可以,2層以上的複數層構成也可以,複數層構成時,這些複數層,互為相同也好,不同也好,這些複數層的組合不特別限定。 又,本說明書中,不論基材的情況,所謂「複數層互為相同也好不同也好」,意味「全部的層相同也好,全部的層不相同也好,只有一部分的層相同也好」,又,所謂「複數層互不同」,意味「各層的構成材料及厚度至少一方互為不同。」。The base material may be composed of one layer (single layer), or may be composed of multiple layers of two or more layers. When the multiple layers are constituted, these plural layers may be the same as or different from each other, and the combination of these plural layers is not particularly limited. . In addition, in this specification, regardless of the base material, "a plurality of layers may be the same or different" means "whether all the layers are the same, all the layers are different, or only a part of the layers are the same. ", and the so-called "plural layers are different from each other" means "at least one of the constituent materials and thickness of each layer is different from each other.".

不特別限定基材厚度,但理想是50〜300μm(微米),更理想是60〜140μm。 在此,所謂「基材的厚度」,意味基材全體厚度,例如,所謂複數層構成的基材厚度,意味構成基材的全部層的合計厚度。The thickness of the substrate is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50 to 300 μm (micrometer), more preferably 60 to 140 μm. Here, the "thickness of the base material" means the thickness of the entire base material, for example, the thickness of the base material composed of multiple layers means the total thickness of all the layers constituting the base material.

基材,除了上述樹脂等的主要構成材料以外,也可以含有填充材、著色劑、帶電防止劑、氧化防止劑、有機潤滑劑、軟化劑(可塑劑)等眾所周知的各種添加劑。The base material may contain various well-known additives such as fillers, colorants, antistatic agents, antioxidation agents, organic lubricants, softeners (plasticizers), and the like in addition to the main constituent materials such as the above-mentioned resins.

基材,為了提高與其上設置的層(例如,黏合劑層、膜狀接合劑等)的接合性,噴砂(sand blasting)處理、溶劑處理等引起的凹凸化處理;電暈放電(corona discharge)、電子線照射處理、電漿處理、臭氧.紫外線處理、火焰處理、鉻酸(chromic acid) 處理、熱風處理等氧化處理;等在表面上施行也可以。又,基材的表面施行電漿處理也可以。Substrate, in order to improve the bondability with the layer provided thereon (for example, adhesive layer, film-like adhesive, etc.), roughening treatment caused by sand blasting (sand blasting), solvent treatment, etc.; corona discharge (corona discharge) , Electron beam irradiation treatment, plasma treatment, ozone. Oxidation treatments such as ultraviolet treatment, flame treatment, chromic acid treatment, hot air treatment, etc. can also be performed on the surface. In addition, the surface of the substrate may be subjected to plasma treatment.

基材,可以利用眾所周知的方法製造。例如,含有樹脂的基材可以透過成形含有上述樹脂的樹脂組成物製造。The substrate can be produced by a well-known method. For example, a substrate containing a resin can be produced by molding a resin composition containing the above-mentioned resin.

◎黏合劑層 構成上述黏晶片中的支撐片之上述黏合劑層(例如,構成黏晶片101中的支撐片10之黏合劑層12),係片狀或膜狀,含有黏合劑。 作為上述黏合劑,例如,丙烯酸樹脂(acrylic resin)、氨酯(urethane)樹脂、橡膠樹脂、矽氧(silicone) 樹脂、環氧樹脂、聚乙烯醚(polyvinyl ether)、聚碳酸酯(polycarbonate)、酯(ester)類樹脂等的黏合性樹脂。◎Adhesive layer The above-mentioned adhesive layer constituting the support sheet in the above-mentioned die-bonding (for example, the adhesive layer 12 constituting the support sheet 10 in the die-bonding 101 ) is in the form of a sheet or film and contains an adhesive. Examples of the aforementioned binder include acrylic resin, urethane resin, rubber resin, silicone resin, epoxy resin, polyvinyl ether, polycarbonate, Adhesive resins such as ester resins.

又,本說明書中,「黏合性樹脂」中,包含具有黏合性的樹脂以及具有接合性的樹脂兩方。例如,上述黏合性樹脂中,不只樹脂本身具有黏合性,還包含由於與添加劑等其它成分並用顯示黏合性的樹脂,以及由於熱或水等觸發存在顯示接合性的樹脂等。In addition, in this specification, "adhesive resin" includes both an adhesive resin and an adhesive resin. For example, the above-mentioned adhesive resins include not only the adhesiveness of the resin itself, but also resins exhibiting adhesiveness due to the combination with other components such as additives, and resins exhibiting adhesiveness due to the presence of triggers such as heat or water.

黏合劑層由1層(單層)構成也可以,由2層以上的複數層構成也可以,複數層構成時,這些複數層互為相同也可以不同也可以,不特別限定這些複數層的組合。The adhesive layer may be composed of one layer (single layer), or may be composed of multiple layers of two or more layers. When composed of multiple layers, these multiple layers may be the same or different from each other, and the combination of these multiple layers is not particularly limited. .

黏合劑層的厚度,不特別限定,但理想是1〜100μm,1〜60μm更理想,1〜30μm特別理想。 在此,所謂「黏合劑層的厚度」,意味黏合劑層全體的厚度,例如,複數層構成的黏合劑層厚度,意味構成黏合劑層的全部層的合計厚度。The thickness of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 1 to 60 μm, and particularly preferably 1 to 30 μm. Here, the "thickness of the adhesive layer" means the thickness of the entire adhesive layer, for example, the thickness of the adhesive layer consisting of a plurality of layers means the total thickness of all the layers constituting the adhesive layer.

黏合劑層,使用能量線硬化性黏合劑形成也可以,使用非能量線硬化性黏合劑形成也可以。即,黏合劑層,能量線硬化性及非能量線硬化性都可以。能量線硬化性的黏合劑層,可以輕易調節其硬化前及硬化後的物理性質。The adhesive layer may be formed using an energy ray-curable adhesive or may be formed using a non-energy ray-curable adhesive. That is, the adhesive layer may be both energy ray curable and non-energy ray curable. The energy ray hardening adhesive layer can easily adjust its physical properties before and after hardening.

本說明書中,所謂「能量線」,意味在電磁波或荷電粒子線中具有能量量子,例如,紫外線、放射線、電子線等。紫外線,例如藉由使用高壓水銀燈、熔解燈(fusion lamp)、氙燈(xenon lamp)、黑光(black light)或LED(發光二極體)燈等作為紫外線源,可以照射。電子束,可以照射由電子束加速器等產生之物。 又,本說明書中,所謂「能量線硬化性」,意味透過照射能量線硬化的性質,所謂「非能量線硬化性」,意味即使照射能量線也不硬化的性質。In this specification, the term "energy rays" means energy quanta in electromagnetic waves or charged particle rays, for example, ultraviolet rays, radiation rays, electron rays, and the like. Ultraviolet rays can be irradiated by using, for example, a high-pressure mercury lamp, a fusion lamp, a xenon lamp, a black light, or an LED (light emitting diode) lamp as an ultraviolet light source. Electron beams can irradiate things produced by electron beam accelerators and the like. In addition, in this specification, "energy ray curability" means the property of being cured by irradiation of energy ray, and "non-energy ray curability" means the property of not being cured even when irradiated with energy ray.

黏合劑層,可以使用含有黏合劑的黏合劑組成物形成。例如,黏合劑層的形成對象面上塗佈黏合劑組成物,由於根據需要加以乾燥,目標部位上可以形成黏合劑層。黏合劑組成物中常溫不蒸發的成分之間含有量的比率,通常與黏合劑層中上述成分之間的含有量比率相同。本說明書中,所謂「常溫」,是指不特別冷或熱的溫度,即平常的溫度,例如,15〜25℃的溫度等。The adhesive layer can be formed using an adhesive composition containing an adhesive. For example, the adhesive composition can be applied on the surface to be formed of the adhesive layer and dried as necessary, so that the adhesive layer can be formed on the target site. The content ratio of the components that do not evaporate at room temperature in the adhesive composition is usually the same as the content ratio of the above-mentioned components in the adhesive layer. In this specification, "normal temperature" refers to a temperature that is not particularly cold or hot, that is, an ordinary temperature, for example, a temperature of 15 to 25° C., and the like.

黏合劑組成物的塗佈,只要以眾所周知的方法進行即可,例如,使用氣刀塗佈機、刮板塗佈機、刮棒塗佈機、凹版塗佈機、滾筒塗佈機、滾刀塗佈機、簾狀塗佈機、壓鑄模塗佈機、刮刀塗佈機、網板塗佈機、繞線棒(meyer bar)塗佈機、吻合(kiss)塗佈機等各種塗佈機的方法。Coating of the adhesive composition may be carried out by a well-known method, for example, using an air knife coater, blade coater, bar coater, gravure coater, roll coater, hob coater, etc. Coater, Curtain Coater, Die-cast Coater, Blade Coater, Screen Coater, Meyer Bar Coater, Kiss Coater, etc. Methods.

基材上設置黏著劑層時,例如,基材上塗佈黏合劑組成物,根據需要加以乾燥,只要基材上積層黏合劑層即可,又,基材上設置黏合劑層時,例如,剝離膜上塗佈黏合劑組成物,根據需要加以乾燥,剝離膜上先形成黏合劑層,黏貼此黏合劑層的露出面與基材一方的表面,在基材上積層黏合劑層也可以。此時的剝離膜,只要在黏晶片的製造過程或使用過程的其中任一時機除去即可。When the adhesive layer is provided on the base material, for example, the adhesive composition is coated on the base material and dried as needed, as long as the adhesive layer is laminated on the base material, and when the adhesive layer is provided on the base material, for example, The adhesive composition is coated on the release film, dried as necessary, an adhesive layer is formed on the release film, and the exposed surface of the adhesive layer is bonded to the surface of the base material to laminate the adhesive layer on the base material. The peeling film at this time may be removed at any timing during the manufacturing process or the use process of the bonded wafer.

黏合劑層是能量線硬化性時,作為能量線硬化性的黏合劑組成物,例如含有非能量線硬化性的黏合性樹脂(I-1a)(以下,有時概述為「黏合性樹脂(I-1a)」)及能量線硬化性化合物的黏合劑組成物(I-1);含有非能量線硬化性的黏合性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈中導入不飽和基的能量線硬化性的黏合性樹脂(I-2a) (以下,有時概述為「黏合性樹脂(I-2a)」)的黏合劑組成物(I-2);以及含有上述黏合性樹脂(I-2a)及能量線硬化性化合物之的黏合劑組成物(I-3)。When the adhesive layer is energy ray curable, the energy ray curable adhesive composition includes, for example, a non-energy ray curable adhesive resin (I-1a) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "adhesive resin (I-1a) -1a) ") and an energy ray-curable adhesive composition (I-1); energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) containing an unsaturated group introduced into the side chain of the non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) An adhesive composition (I-2) containing the adhesive resin (I-2a) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "adhesive resin (I-2a)"); and an adhesive composition (I-2) containing the above adhesive resin (I-2a) and Adhesive composition (I-3) of an energy ray-curable compound.

黏合劑層是非能量線硬化性時,作為非能量線硬化性的黏合劑組成物,例如,含有上述非能量線硬化性的黏合性樹脂(I-1a)的黏合劑組成物(I-4)等。When the adhesive layer is non-energy ray-curable, the non-energy ray-curable adhesive composition is, for example, the adhesive composition (I-4) containing the above-mentioned non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a). wait.

[黏合性樹脂(I-1a)] 上述黏合劑組成物(I-1)、黏合劑組成物(I-2)、黏合劑組成物(I-3)及黏合劑組成物(I-4)(以下,包括這些黏合劑組成物,概述為黏合劑組成物(I-1)〜(I-4))中的上述黏合性樹脂(I-1a),理想是丙烯酸樹脂。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] The above adhesive composition (I-1), adhesive composition (I-2), adhesive composition (I-3) and adhesive composition (I-4) (hereinafter, including these adhesive compositions, The above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-1) to (I-4)) is summarized, preferably an acrylic resin.

作為上述丙烯酸樹脂,例如,至少具有構成單位來自丙烯酸烷基酯(methacrylic acid alkyl ester)的丙烯酸聚合物。 作為上述丙烯酸烷基酯(methacrylic acid alkyl ester),例如,構成烷基酯 (alkyl ester)的烷基的碳數是1〜20,上述烷基理想是直鏈狀或分叉鏈狀。As the above-mentioned acrylic resin, for example, an acrylic polymer having at least a constituent unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester. As the above-mentioned methacrylic acid alkyl ester, for example, the carbon number of the alkyl group constituting the alkyl ester (alkyl ester) is 1 to 20, and the above-mentioned alkyl group is preferably a straight chain or a branched chain.

上述丙烯酸聚合物,除了來自丙烯酸烷基酯(methacrylic acid alkyl ester)的構成單位之外,還有理想是具有來自含官能基單體的構成單位。 作為上述含官能基單體,例如,透過上述官能基與後述的交聯劑反應成為交聯的起點,或透過上述官能基與後述的含不飽和基化合物中的不飽和基反應可導入不飽和基至丙烯酸聚合物的側鏈內。The above-mentioned acrylic polymer desirably has a constituent unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer in addition to the constituent unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester. As the above-mentioned functional group-containing monomer, for example, by reacting the above-mentioned functional group with a cross-linking agent described later to become a starting point of cross-linking, or by reacting the above-mentioned functional group with an unsaturated group in an unsaturated group-containing compound described later, unsaturation can be introduced. group into the side chain of the acrylic polymer.

作為上述含官能基單體,例如,含羥基(hydroxyl)單體、含羧基(carboxy) 單體、含鋁基單體、含環氧樹脂單體等。As the above-mentioned functional group-containing monomer, for example, a hydroxyl group-containing monomer, a carboxy group-containing monomer, an aluminum group-containing monomer, an epoxy resin-containing monomer, and the like.

上述丙烯酸聚合物,除了來自丙烯酸烷基酯(methacrylic acid alkyl ester)的構成單位及來自含官能基單體的構成單位之外,還有來自其它單體的構成單位也可以。 上述其它單體,只要可以與丙烯酸烷基酯(methacrylic acid alkyl ester)等共聚合,不特別限定。 作為上述其它單體,例如苯乙烯(styrene)、α‐甲苯乙烯(α‐methylstyrene)、乙烯基甲苯(vinyl toluene)、甲酸乙烯(formic acid vinyl)、醋酸乙烯酯(vinyl acetate)、丙烯腈(acrylic nitrile)、丙烯酰胺(acrylic amid)等。The above-mentioned acrylic polymer may have constituent units derived from other monomers in addition to the constituent units derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester and the constituent units derived from functional group-containing monomers. The above-mentioned other monomers are not particularly limited as long as they can be copolymerized with methacrylic acid alkyl ester or the like. Examples of the above-mentioned other monomers include styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, formic acid vinyl, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile ( acrylic nitrole), acrylamide (acrylic amid), etc.

黏合劑組成物(I-1)〜(I-4)中,上述丙烯酸聚合物等的上述丙烯酸樹脂具有的構成單位,只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。In the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4), the constituent units of the above-mentioned acrylic resin such as the above-mentioned acrylic polymer may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, any Choose from these combinations and ratios.

上述丙烯酸聚合物中, 來自含官能基單體的構成單位的含有量,對於構成單位的全量,理想是1〜35質量%。In the above-mentioned acrylic polymer, the content of the structural unit derived from the functional group-containing monomer is preferably 1 to 35% by mass based on the total amount of the structural unit.

黏合劑組成物(I-1)或黏合劑組成物(I-4)含有的黏合性樹脂(1-1a),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上的話,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The adhesive resin (1-1a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) or the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. If there are two or more types, it may be arbitrarily selected These combinations and ratios.

黏合劑組成物(I-1) 或黏合劑組成物(I-4)中,對於黏合劑組成物(I-1) 或黏合劑組成物(I-4)總質量的黏合性樹脂(1-1a)含有量的比率,理想是5〜99質量%。In the adhesive composition (I-1) or the adhesive composition (I-4), the adhesive resin (1- 1a) The ratio of the content is ideally 5 to 99% by mass.

[黏合性樹脂(I-2a)] 上述黏合劑組成物(I-2)及 (I-3)中的上述黏合性樹脂(I-2a),例如透過反應黏合性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基和具有能量線可聚合不飽和基的不飽和基含有化合物得到。[Adhesive resin (I-2a)] The above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-2a) in the above-mentioned adhesive composition (I-2) and (I-3), for example, reacts the functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) and has energy ray polymerizable non- Saturated groups are obtained from unsaturated group-containing compounds.

上述不飽和基含有化合物,係除了上述能量線可聚合不飽和基以外,還透過與黏合性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基反應,具有可與黏合性樹脂(I-1a)結合的基之化合物。 作為上述能量線可聚合不飽和基,例如丙烯醯基 (meth acryloyl)、乙烯基(vinyl,ethenyl)、烯丙基(allyl)(2- propenyl基)等,理想是丙烯醯基(meth acryloyl)。 作為可與黏合性樹脂(1-1a)中的官能基結合的基,例如可與羥基(hydroxyl)或胺基(amino)結合的異氰酸基(isocyanate) 及環氧丙基(glycidyl)以及可與羧基(carboxy)或環氧基(epoxy)結合的羥基及胺基(amino)等。The above-mentioned unsaturated group-containing compound has a group capable of bonding to the adhesive resin (I-1a) by reacting with a functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) in addition to the above-mentioned energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group. compound. As the above energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group, for example, acryl (meth acryloyl), vinyl (vinyl, ethyl), allyl (2-propenyl) etc., preferably acryl (meth acryloyl) . As the group that can be bonded to the functional group in the adhesive resin (1-1a), for example, an isocyanate group (isocyanate) and a glycidyl group (glycidyl) that can be bonded to a hydroxyl group (hydroxyl) or an amino group (amino) and Hydroxyl, amino, etc. that can be combined with carboxy or epoxy.

作為上述不飽和基含有化合物,例如丙烯醯基乙氧異氰酸酯(meth acryloyl oxyethyl isocyanate)、丙烯醯基異氰酸酯(meth acryloyl isocyanate) 、縮水甘油丙烯酸酯(glycidyl (meth) acrylate)等。Examples of the unsaturated group-containing compound include meth acryloyl oxyethyl isocyanate, meth acryloyl isocyanate, glycidyl (meth) acrylate and the like.

黏合劑組成物(I-2)或(I-3)含有的黏合性樹脂(I-2a),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上的話,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The adhesive resin (I-2a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) or (I-3) may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. If there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily .

黏合劑組成物(I-2)或(I-3)中,對於黏合劑組成物(I-2) 或 (I-3)總質量的黏合性樹脂(1-2a)含有量的比率,理想是5〜99質量%。In the adhesive composition (I-2) or (I-3), the ratio of the content of the adhesive resin (1-2a) to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-2) or (I-3), ideally It is 5 to 99% by mass.

[能量線硬化性化合物] 作為上述黏合劑組成物(I-1)及(I-3)中的上述能量線硬化性化合物,舉出具有能量線可聚合不飽和基,以能量線照射可硬化的單體(monomer)或低聚物(oligomer)。[Energy Beam Curing Compound] Examples of the above-mentioned energy ray-curable compounds in the above-mentioned adhesive compositions (I-1) and (I-3) include energy ray-polymerizable unsaturated groups that can be cured by energy ray irradiation or oligomers.

能量線硬化性化合物中,作為單體,例如三羥甲基丙烷三丙烯酸酯(trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate)、季戊四醇丙烯酸酯(pentaerythritol (meth)acrylate)、季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯(pentaerythritol tetra (meth)acrylate)、二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯(dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylatel)、1, 4丁二醇二丙烯酸酯(1, 4 butylene glycol di(meth)acrylate)、1, 6-己二醇丙烯酸酯(1,6-hexanediol (meth)acrylate)等多價丙烯酸酯;丙烯酸氨基甲酸乙酯(urethane (meth)acrylate);丙烯酸聚酯(polyester (meth)acrylate);丙烯酸聚醚(polyether (meth)acrylate);環氧丙烯酸酯 (epoxy (meth)acrylate)等。 能量線硬化性化合物中,作為低聚物,例如,上述中例示的單體聚合而成的低聚物。Among the energy ray-curing compounds, examples of monomers include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol (meth)acrylate, and pentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate. acrylate), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylatel), 1,4 butylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol acrylate (1 , 6-hexanediol (meth)acrylate) and other polyvalent acrylates; urethane (meth)acrylate; acrylate polyester (polyester (meth)acrylate); acrylic polyether (polyether (meth)acrylate); Epoxy (meth) acrylate, etc. Among the energy ray-curable compounds, the oligomer is, for example, an oligomer obtained by polymerizing the monomers exemplified above.

黏合劑組成物(I-1)或(I-3)含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上的話,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The above-mentioned energy ray-curing compounds contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) or (I-3) may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. If there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

上述黏合劑組成物(I-1)中,對於黏合劑組成物(I-1)總質量的上述能量線硬化性化合物含有量的比率,理想是1〜95質量%。 上述黏合劑組成物(I-3)中,上述能量線硬化性化合物含有量,對於黏合性樹脂(I-2a) 含有量100質量份,理想是0.01〜300質量份。In the above adhesive composition (I-1), the ratio of the content of the energy ray-curable compound to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-1) is desirably 1 to 95% by mass. In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the energy ray-curable compound is preferably 0.01 to 300 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the adhesive resin (I-2a).

[交聯劑] 作為黏合性樹脂(I-1a),使用的上述丙烯酸聚合物,除了具有來自丙烯酸烷基酯(methacrylic acid alkyl ester)的構成單位以外,還具有來自含官能基單體的構成單位時,黏合劑組成物(I-1)或(I-4)理想是更含有交聯劑。 又,作為黏合性樹脂(I-2a),例如,使用具有與黏合性樹脂(I-1a)中相同的來自含官能基單體的構成單位之上述丙烯酸聚合物時,黏合劑組成物(I-2) 還可以含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] When the above-mentioned acrylic polymer used as the adhesive resin (I-1a) has a constituent unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer in addition to a constituent unit derived from a methacrylic acid alkyl ester, the adhesive Composition (I-1) or (I-4) preferably further contains a crosslinking agent. Also, when the above-mentioned acrylic polymer having the same structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer as in the adhesive resin (I-1a) is used as the adhesive resin (I-2a), the adhesive composition (I-2a) -2) It may also contain a crosslinking agent.

上述黏合性樹脂(I-1a)以及(I-2a)中的上述交聯劑,例如,與上述官能基反應,交聯黏合性樹脂(I-1a)之間或黏合性樹脂(I-2a)之間。 作為交聯劑,例如甲苯基二異氰酸酯 (tolylene diisocyanate)、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯(hexamethylene diisocyanate)、苯二甲撑二异氰酸酯(xylylene diisocyanate)、這些二異氰酸酯的加成物(adduct)等的異氰酸酯 (isocyanate) 交聯劑(具有異氰酸酯基的交聯劑);乙二醇縮水甘油醚(ethylene glycol glycidyl ether)等環氧系交聯劑(具有環氧丙基的交聯劑);六[1- (2-甲基) -氮丙啶]三氟甲磺酸三嗪(hexa [1- (2-methyl) - aziridinyl] triflate male fan triazine)等氮丙啶系交聯劑(具有氮丙啶基的交聯劑);鋁鉗合物(aluminum chelate)等金屬鉗合物系交聯劑(具有金屬鉗合物構造的交聯劑);異氰脲酸(isocyanurate)系交聯劑(異氰脲酸骨骼(isocyanuric acid skeleton)等。The above-mentioned cross-linking agent in the above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-1a) and (I-2a), for example, reacts with the above-mentioned functional group to cross-link the adhesive resin (I-1a) or the adhesive resin (I-2a )between. As the crosslinking agent, for example, isocyanates such as tolylene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, and adducts of these diisocyanates (isocyanate) cross-linking agent (cross-linking agent with isocyanate group); epoxy-based cross-linking agent (cross-linking agent with epoxypropyl group) such as ethylene glycol glycidyl ether; six [1 - (2-Methyl) - aziridinyl] trifluoromethanesulfonate triazine (hexa [1- (2-methyl) - aziridinyl] triflate male fan triazine) and other aziridine cross-linking agents (with aziridinyl based crosslinking agent); aluminum chelate and other metal chelate crosslinking agents (crosslinking agents with metal chelate structure); isocyanurate (isocyanurate) crosslinking agents (isocyanurate) Cyanuric acid skeleton (isocyanuric acid skeleton) and so on.

黏合劑組成物(I-1)、(I-2)或(I-4)含有的交聯劑,僅1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上的話,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-1), (I-2) or (I-4) may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. If there are two or more types, these combinations and ratio.

上述黏合劑組成物(I-1)或(I-4)中,交聯劑含有量,對於黏合性樹脂(I-1a) 含有量100質量份,理想是0.01〜50質量份。 上述黏合劑組成物(I-2)中,交聯劑含有量,對於黏合性樹脂(I-2a) 含有量100質量份,理想是0.01〜50質量份。In the above adhesive composition (I-1) or (I-4), the crosslinking agent content is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the adhesive resin (I-1a) content. In the above adhesive composition (I-2), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the adhesive resin (I-2a) content.

[感光聚合起始劑] 黏合劑組成物(I-1)、(I-2)或(I-3)(以下,包括這些黏合劑組成物,概述為「黏合劑組成物(I-1)〜(I-3)」),還可以包含感光聚合起始劑。含有感光聚合起始劑的黏合劑組成物(I-1)〜(I-3),即使照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,硬化反應也充分進行。[Photopolymerization Initiator] Adhesive composition (I-1), (I-2) or (I-3) (hereinafter, including these adhesive compositions, are summarized as "adhesive composition (I-1)~(I-3)" ), may also include a photopolymerization initiator. Adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) containing a photopolymerization initiator fully progressed the curing reaction even when irradiated with relatively low-energy energy rays such as ultraviolet rays.

作為上述感光聚合起始劑,例如苯偶姻(benzoin)、苯偶姻甲醚(benzoin methyl ether)、苯偶姻乙醚(benzoin ethyl ether)、苯偶姻異丙醚(benzoin isopropyl ether)、苯偶姻異丁醚(benzoin isobutyl ether) 、苯偶姻(benzoin)安息香酸、甲基苯偶姻安息香酸 (benzoin benzoic acid methyl)、苯偶姻二甲基醇縮酮(benzoin dimethyl ketal)等的苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮(acetophenone)、2-羥-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮(2-hydroxy-2 - methyl-1-phenyl - propane-1-one) 、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯乙烷-1-酮(2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one)等的苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯酰)苯基膦氧化物(bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) phenyl phosphine oxide)、2,4,6-三甲基苯酰二苯基膦氧化物(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl diphenyl phosphine oxide)等的酰基膦氧化物(acylphosphine oxide)化合物;苄基苯基硫醚(benzyl phenyl sulfide)、一硫化四甲基秋蘭姆(tetramethylthiuram monosulfide)等硫醚化合物;1-羥基環己基苯酮(1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone)等α酮醇(alpha-ketol)化合物;偶氮二異丁腈(azobisisobutyronitrile)等偶氮(Azo)化合物;環戊二烯鈦(titanocene)等環戊二烯鈦化合物;噻噸酮(thioxanthone)等噻噸酮化合物;過氧化物(peroxide)化合物;聯乙醯(diacetyl)等二酮(diketone)化合物 ;二苯基乙二酮(benzil);聯苄(dibenzyl);二苯甲酮(benzophenone);2, 4-二乙基噻噸酮(diethylthioxanthone);1, 2-二苯甲烷(1, 2-diphenyl methane) ;2-羥-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯)苯基丙酮(2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl]propanone);1-氯蒽醌(1-chloroanthraquinone)、2-氯蒽醌(2-chloroanthraquinone)等醌化合物。 又,作為上述感光聚合起始劑,例如,也可以使用胺(amine)等光增感劑等。Examples of the aforementioned photopolymerization initiator include benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin Benzoin isobutyl ether, benzoin benzoic acid, methyl benzoin benzoic acid methyl, benzoin dimethyl ketal, etc. Benzoin compounds; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propane-1-one (2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propane-1-one) , 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one (2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one) and other acetophenone compounds; bis(2, 4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) phenyl phosphine oxide (bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) phenyl phosphine oxide), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl diphenyl phosphine oxide (2 , 4,6-trimethylbenzoyl diphenyl phosphine oxide) and other acylphosphine oxide compounds; benzyl phenyl sulfide, tetramethylthiuram monosulfide and other sulfide compounds ; 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone (1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone) and other alpha-ketol (alpha-ketol) compounds; azobisisobutyronitrile (azobisisobutyronitrile) and other azo (Azo) compounds; ) and other cyclopentadienyl titanium compounds; thioxanthone (thioxanthone) and other thioxanthone compounds; peroxide (peroxide) compounds; diacetyl (diacetyl) and other diketone (diketone) compounds; benzil); bibenzyl (dibenzyl); benzophenone (benzophenone); 2, 4-diethylthioxanthone (diethylthioxanthone); 1, 2-diphenylmethane (1, 2-diphenylmethane); 2-hydroxy -2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenylacetone (2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl]propanone); 1-chloroanthraquinone (1-chloroanthraquinone), 2-chloroanthraquinone (2-chloroanthraquinone) and other quinone compounds. Moreover, as said photopolymerization initiator, photosensitizers, such as an amine, etc. can also be used, for example.

黏合劑組成物(I-1)〜(I-3)含有的感光聚合起始劑,只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上的話,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The photopolymerization initiators contained in the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. If there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

黏合劑組成物(I-1)中,感光聚合起始劑的含有量,對於上述能量線硬化性化合物含有量100質量份,理想是0.01〜20質量份。 黏合劑組成物(I-2)中,感光聚合起始劑的含有量,對於黏合性樹脂(I-2a)含有量100質量份,理想是0.01〜20質量份。 黏合劑組成物(I-3)中,感光聚合起始劑的含有量,對於黏合性樹脂(I-2a)及上述能量線硬化性化合物的總含有量100質量份,理想是0.01〜20質量份。The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the energy ray-curable compound. The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-2) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the adhesive resin (I-2a). The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-3) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) and the energy ray-curable compound. share.

[其它添加劑] 黏合劑組成物(I-1)〜(I-4),只在不損害本發明效果的範圍內,含有不符合上述任何成分的其它添加劑也可以。 作為上述其它添加劑,例如帶電防止劑、氧化防止劑、軟化劑(可塑劑)、填充材(filler)、防鏽劑、著色劑(顏料、染料)、增感劑、黏合授予劑、反應延遲劑、交聯促進劑(觸媒)等眾所周知的添加劑。 又,所謂反應延遲劑,例如根據黏合劑組成物(I-1) 〜(I-4)中混入的觸媒作用,保存中的黏合劑組成物(I-1)〜(I-4)中,可以抑制非目標的交聯反應進行。作為反應延遲劑,例如,利用對觸媒的鉗合物(chelate) 形成鉗合複合物,更具體地,1分子中有2個以上羰基(carbonyl)(-C(=O)-)。[Other additives] Adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4) may contain other additives that do not correspond to any of the above-mentioned components, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. Other additives mentioned above include antistatic agents, antioxidation agents, softeners (plasticizers), fillers, antirust agents, colorants (pigments, dyes), sensitizers, adhesion imparting agents, and reaction delay agents. , crosslinking accelerator (catalyst) and other well-known additives. In addition, the so-called reaction delaying agent is, for example, due to the catalytic action mixed in the adhesive composition (I-1) to (I-4), in the adhesive composition (I-1) to (I-4) during storage , can inhibit the non-target cross-linking reaction. As a reaction delaying agent, for example, a chelate complex is formed by using a chelate with a catalyst, and more specifically, there are two or more carbonyl groups (-C(=O)-) in one molecule.

黏合劑組成物(I-1) 〜(I-4)含有的其它添加劑,只一種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上的話,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The other additives contained in the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

黏合劑組成物(I-1) 〜(I-4)的其它添加劑含有量,不特別限定,只要根據種類適當選擇即可。The content of other additives in the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4) is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the type.

[溶媒] 黏合劑組成物(I-1) 〜(I-4),含有溶媒也可以。黏合劑組成物(I-1) 〜(I-4),由於含有溶媒,提高對塗佈對象面的塗佈適合性。[solvent] The adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4) may contain a solvent. Since the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4) contain a solvent, the coating suitability to the surface to be coated is improved.

上述溶媒理想是有機溶媒,作為上述有機溶媒,例如甲基乙基酮(methyl ethyl ketone)、丙酮(acetone)等酮(ketone);醋酸乙酯(ethyl acetate)等酯(ester) (羧酸酯(carboxylic acid ester));四氫呋喃(tetrahydrofuran)、二氧六環(dioxane)等醚(ether);環己烷(cyclohexane)、n-己烷(n-hexane)等脂肪族碳水化合物等;甲苯(toluene)、二甲苯(xylene)等芳香族碳水化合物;1-丙醇(1-propanol)、2-丙醇(2-propanol)等醇類等。The above-mentioned solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and as the above-mentioned organic solvent, for example, ketones (ketones) such as methyl ethyl ketone (methyl ethyl ketone) and acetone (acetone); esters (esters) (carboxylates) such as ethyl acetate (ethyl acetate) (carboxylic acid ester)); ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dioxane; aliphatic carbohydrates such as cyclohexane and n-hexane, etc.; toluene ( Aromatic carbohydrates such as toluene and xylene; alcohols such as 1-propanol and 2-propanol, etc.

黏合劑組成物(I-1) 〜(I-4)含有的溶媒,只一種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上的話,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The solvents contained in the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

黏合劑組成物(I-1) 〜(I-4)的溶媒含有量,不特別限定,只要適當調節即可。The solvent content of the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4) is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

○黏合劑組成物的製造方法 黏合劑組成物(I-1) 〜(I-4)等的黏合劑組成物,透過配合上述黏合劑以及根據需要用以構成上述黏合劑以外的成分等黏合劑組成物的各成分得到。 各成分配合時添加順序不特別限定,同時添加2種以上也可以。 配合時混合各成分的方法不特別限定,旋轉攪拌棒或攪拌漿葉等混合的方法;利用攪拌器混合的方法;施加超音波混合的方法等,只要從眾所周知的方法適當選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度和時間,只要各配合成分不惡化,就不特別限定,只要適當調節即可,溫度理想是15〜30℃。○Manufacturing method of adhesive composition Adhesive compositions such as adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-4) are obtained by blending the above-mentioned adhesive and, if necessary, components constituting the adhesive composition such as components other than the above-mentioned adhesive. The order of addition of each component is not particularly limited, and two or more kinds may be added simultaneously. The method of mixing the components at the time of compounding is not particularly limited, and the method of mixing such as rotating a stirring bar or stirring paddle; mixing with a stirrer; mixing with ultrasonic waves, etc. may be appropriately selected from well-known methods. The temperature and time for the addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as the components are not deteriorated, as long as they are appropriately adjusted, and the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

○膜狀黏合劑 構成上述黏晶片的上述膜狀黏合劑(例如,構成黏晶片101的上述膜狀黏合劑13),理想是具有熱硬化性,且理想是具有壓感接合性。同時具有熱硬化性及壓感接合性的膜狀接合劑,在未硬化狀態下經由輕壓各黏附體可以黏貼。又,膜狀接合劑,經由加熱軟化可以黏貼至各種黏附體也可以。膜狀黏合劑,經由硬化最終成為耐衝擊性高的硬化物,此硬化物,即使在嚴酷的高溫.高溼度條件下,也能夠保持充分的接合特性。○Film adhesive The film adhesive constituting the die attach (for example, the film adhesive 13 constituting the die attach 101 ) desirably has thermosetting properties and preferably has pressure-sensitive bonding properties. The film-like adhesive with thermosetting and pressure-sensitive bonding properties can be pasted by lightly pressing each adherend in the uncured state. In addition, the film-like adhesive may be bonded to various adherends by heating and softening. The film adhesive, after hardening, finally becomes a hardened product with high impact resistance. This hardened product can withstand severe high temperatures. Sufficient bonding properties can be maintained even under high humidity conditions.

膜狀接合劑以1層(單層)構成也可以,以2層以上的複數層構成也可以,以複數層構成時,這些複數層,互為相同也好,不同也好,這些複數層的組合不特別限定。The film-like adhesive may be composed of one layer (single layer), or may be composed of multiple layers of two or more layers. When composed of multiple layers, these plural layers may be the same as or different from each other. The combination is not particularly limited.

膜狀接合劑的厚度,不特別限定,但理想是1〜100μm(微米),1〜60μm更理想,1〜30μm特別理想。 在此,所謂「膜狀接合劑的厚度」,意味膜狀接合劑全體的厚度,例如,所謂以複數層構成的膜狀接合劑厚度,意味應構成膜狀接合劑的層之合計厚度。The thickness of the film adhesive is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 100 μm (micrometer), more preferably 1 to 60 μm, and particularly preferably 1 to 30 μm. Here, the "thickness of the film adhesive" means the thickness of the entire film adhesive, for example, the thickness of a film adhesive composed of a plurality of layers means the total thickness of the layers constituting the film adhesive.

膜狀接合劑,可以利用含有其構成成分的接合劑組成物形成。例如,膜狀接合劑的形成對象面上塗佈接合劑組成物,根據需要乾燥,可以在目標部位形成膜狀接合劑。接合劑組成物中,常溫下不蒸發的成分之間的含有量比率,通常與膜狀接合劑中的上述成分之間的含有量比率相同。The film-like adhesive can be formed using an adhesive composition containing its constituent components. For example, the adhesive composition can be applied on the surface to be formed of the film adhesive, and dried as necessary to form the film adhesive on the target site. In the adhesive composition, the content ratio of the components that do not evaporate at normal temperature is usually the same as the content ratio of the above-mentioned components in the film adhesive.

接合劑組成物,可以利用先前說明的接合劑組成物時相同的方法塗布。The cement composition can be applied by the same method as the cement composition described above.

支撐片上設置膜狀接合劑時,例如,支撐片上塗布接合劑組成物,根據需要乾燥,只要支撐片上積層膜狀接合劑即可。又,支撐片上設置膜狀接合劑時,例如,剝離膜塗布接合劑組成物,根據需要乾燥,在剝離膜上先形成膜狀接合劑,將此膜狀接合劑的露出面與支撐片的目標表面互相黏貼,在支撐片上積層膜狀接合劑也可以。此時的剝離膜,在黏晶片的製造過程或使用過程其中任一時機除去即可。When the film-like adhesive is provided on the support sheet, for example, the adhesive composition is coated on the support sheet and dried if necessary, and the film-like adhesive may be laminated on the support sheet. In addition, when the film adhesive is provided on the support sheet, for example, the adhesive composition is coated on a release film, dried if necessary, and the film adhesive is first formed on the release film, and the exposed surface of the film adhesive is aligned with the target surface of the support sheet. The surfaces are bonded to each other, and a film-like adhesive can be laminated on the support sheet. The peeling film at this time may be removed at any timing during the manufacturing process or the use process of the bonded wafer.

作為理想的接合劑組成物,舉出熱硬化性接合劑組成物。 作為熱硬化性接合劑組成物,例如含有聚合物成分(a)及環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)。以下,說明關於各成分。A thermosetting adhesive composition is mentioned as an ideal adhesive composition. The thermosetting adhesive composition contains, for example, a polymer component (a) and an epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b). Hereinafter, each component is demonstrated.

[聚合物成分(a)] 聚合物成分(a),係看作可聚合化合物聚合反應形成時的成分,且隨著膜狀接合劑上授予造膜性或可撓性等,用以提高對半導體晶片等接合對象的接合性(黏貼性)的高分子成分。又,聚合物成分(a),也有不符合後述環氧樹脂(b1)及熱硬化劑(b2)的成分。[Polymer component (a)] The polymer component (a) is regarded as a component formed during the polymerization reaction of a polymerizable compound, and is used to improve the bonding property to bonding objects such as semiconductor wafers by imparting film-forming properties or flexibility to the film-like bonding agent. (adhesive) polymer components. Moreover, the polymer component (a) also has a component which does not correspond to the epoxy resin (b1) and thermosetting agent (b2) mentioned later.

接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑含有的聚合物成分(a),只一種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上的話,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The polymer component (a) contained in the adhesive composition and the film-like adhesive may be only one type, or two or more types may be used, and if there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

作為聚合物成分(a),例如丙烯酸(acrylic)樹脂、聚酯(polyester)、氨酯(urethane) 樹脂、丙烯酸氨酯(acrylic urethane)樹脂、矽氧(silicone) 樹脂、橡膠樹脂、苯氧基(phenoxy)樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺(polyimide)等,理想是丙烯酸(acrylic)樹脂。As the polymer component (a), for example, acrylic resin, polyester, urethane resin, acrylic urethane resin, silicone resin, rubber resin, phenoxy (phenoxy) resin, thermosetting polyimide (polyimide), etc., preferably acrylic (acrylic) resin.

作為聚合物成分(a)中的上述丙烯酸(acrylic)樹脂,舉出眾所周知的丙烯酸聚合物。Well-known acrylic polymers are mentioned as said acrylic (acrylic) resin in a polymer component (a).

構成丙烯酸(acrylic)樹脂的上述丙烯酸酯(methacrylic acid ester),例如,構成烷基酯 (alkyl ester)的烷基,碳數是1〜18的鏈狀構造的上述丙烯酸烷基酯(methacrylic acid alkyl ester);丙烯酸環烷酯((meth)acrylate cycloalkyl ester);丙烯酸芳烷基酯((meth)acrylate aralkyl ester);丙烯酸環烯酯((meth)acrylate cycloalkenyl ester);丙烯酸環烯烷氧酯((meth)acrylate cycloalkenyl  oxylkyl ester);丙烯酸亞胺((meth)acrylate imide);含有環氧丙基(glycidyl)丙烯酸酯;含有羥基(hydroxyl)丙烯酸酯;含有置換胺基(amino)丙烯酸酯等。在此,所謂「置換氨基」,意味以氫原子以外的基置換氨基的1個或2個氫原子形成的基。The above-mentioned acrylate (methacrylic acid ester) constituting the acrylic (acrylic) resin, for example, the alkyl group constituting the alkyl ester (alkyl ester), the above-mentioned methacrylic acid alkyl ester (methacrylic acid alkyl) having a chain structure of 1 to 18 carbon atoms acrylate cycloalkyl ester ((meth)acrylate cycloalkyl ester); acrylate aralkyl ester ((meth)acrylate aralkyl ester); acrylate cycloalkenyl ester ((meth)acrylate cycloalkenyl ester); (meth)acrylate cycloalkenyl oxylkyl ester); acrylic imide ((meth)acrylate imide); containing glycidyl acrylate; containing hydroxyl (hydroxyl) acrylate; containing replacement amino (amino) acrylate, etc. Here, the "substituted amino group" means a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms of an amino group are replaced with a group other than a hydrogen atom.

又,本說明書中,所謂「丙烯酸((meth)acrylate)」,係包含「(meth)acrylate」及「acrylate」兩方的概念。關於與丙烯酸((meth)acrylate)類似的用語也相同。In addition, in this specification, "acrylic acid ((meth)acrylate)" includes both concepts of "(meth)acrylate" and "acrylate". The same applies to terms similar to acrylic acid ((meth)acrylate).

丙烯酸樹脂(acrylic resin),例如,除了上述丙烯酸酯(methacrylic acid ester)以外,從丙烯酸(methacrylic acid)、亞甲基丁二酸(itaconic)、醋酸乙烯酯(vinyl acetate)、丙稀晴(acrylonitrile)、苯乙烯(styrene)及N-羥甲基丙烯酰胺(N-methylol acrylamide)等選擇的1種或2種以上的單體共聚形成也可以。Acrylic resin (acrylic resin), for example, in addition to the above-mentioned methacrylic acid ester (methacrylic acid ester), from acrylic acid (methacrylic acid), methylene succinic acid (itaconic), vinyl acetate (vinyl acetate), acrylonitrile (acrylonitrile) ), styrene (styrene) and N-methylol acrylamide (N-methylol acrylamide) and other selected one or two or more monomers may be formed by copolymerization.

丙烯酸樹脂(acrylic resin),除了上述羥基(hydroxyl)以外,具有與乙烯(vinyl)基、丙烯酸(methacrylic)基、胺基(amino)、羧基(carboxy)、異氰酸基(isocyanate)等其它化物可結合的官能基也可以。以丙烯酸樹脂(acrylic resin)的羥基(hydroxyl) 為首的這些官能基,經由後述的交聯劑(f)與其它化合物結合也可以,不經由交聯劑(f)與其它化合物直接結合也可以。由於丙烯酸樹脂(acrylic resin)以上述官能基與其它化合物結合,使用膜狀接合劑得到的封裝可靠性有提高的傾向。Acrylic resin (acrylic resin), in addition to the above-mentioned hydroxyl (hydroxyl), has other compounds such as vinyl (vinyl) group, acrylic (methacrylic) group, amino group (amino), carboxy group, isocyanate group (isocyanate) and so on. Bondable functional groups are also possible. These functional groups including hydroxyl groups of acrylic resin may be bonded to other compounds via a crosslinking agent (f) described later, or may be directly bonded to other compounds without using a crosslinking agent (f). Since the acrylic resin (acrylic resin) is combined with other compounds through the above-mentioned functional group, the reliability of the package obtained by using the film-like adhesive tends to be improved.

構成丙烯酸樹脂(acrylic resin)的單體,只1 種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The monomers constituting the acrylic resin (acrylic resin) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds. When there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

本實施形態中,作為聚合物成分(a),不使用丙烯酸樹脂,單獨使用丙烯酸樹脂以外的熱可塑性樹脂(以下,有時只概述為「熱可塑性樹脂」)也可以,與丙烯酸樹脂並用也可以。 作為上述熱可塑性樹脂,例如聚酯(polyester)、聚氨基甲酸乙酯(polyurethane)、苯氧基(phenoxy) 樹脂、聚丁烯(polybutene )、聚丁二烯(polybutadiene)、聚苯乙烯(polystyrene)等。In this embodiment, instead of using acrylic resin as the polymer component (a), thermoplastic resins other than acrylic resins (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "thermoplastic resins") may be used alone or in combination with acrylic resins. . Examples of the thermoplastic resin include polyester, polyurethane, phenoxy resin, polybutene, polybutadiene, polystyrene )wait.

接合劑組合物及膜狀接合劑含有的上 述熱可塑性樹脂,只1 種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The above-mentioned thermoplastic resin contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

接合劑組合物的組成中,對溶媒以外的全部成分總含有量之聚合物成分(a)的含有量比例(即,膜狀接合劑中對膜狀接合劑總質量的聚合物成分(a)含有量比例),不拘聚合物成分(a)的種類,理想是20〜75質量%。In the composition of the adhesive composition, the content ratio of the polymer component (a) to the total content of all components except the solvent (that is, the polymer component (a) in the film adhesive to the total mass of the film adhesive content ratio), regardless of the type of polymer component (a), it is ideally 20 to 75% by mass.

[環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)] 環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b),由環氧樹脂(b1)及熱硬化劑(b2)構成。 黏合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑含有的環氧系熱硬化樹脂(b),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。[Epoxy Thermosetting Resin (b)] The epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b) is composed of an epoxy resin (b1) and a thermosetting agent (b2). The epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b) contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

(環氧樹脂(b1)) 作為環氧樹脂(b1),舉出眾所周知的,例如,多官能系環氧樹脂、聯苯(biphenyl)、雙酚A二環氧甘油醚(bisphenol A diglycidyl ether)及其氫化物、鄰甲酚酚醛環氧 (ortho-cresol novolak epoxy) 樹脂、二環戊二烯(dicyclopentadiene)型環氧樹脂、聯苯(biphenyl)型環氧樹脂、雙酚(bisphenol) A型環氧樹脂、雙酚(bisphenol) F型環氧樹脂、亞苯基(phenylene)骨骼型環氧樹脂等,2官能以上的環氧化合物。(Epoxy resin (b1)) Examples of the epoxy resin (b1) include well-known ones such as polyfunctional epoxy resins, biphenyl, bisphenol A diglycidyl ether and its hydrogenated products, o-cresol Novolac epoxy (ortho-cresol novolak epoxy) resin, dicyclopentadiene (dicyclopentadiene) type epoxy resin, biphenyl (biphenyl) type epoxy resin, bisphenol (bisphenol) A type epoxy resin, bisphenol (bisphenol) ) F-type epoxy resin, phenylene (phenylene) skeleton type epoxy resin, etc., epoxy compounds with more than two functions.

接合劑組合物及膜狀接合劑含有的環氧樹脂(b1),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The epoxy resin (b1) contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive may be only one type, or two or more types may be used, and in the case of two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

(熱硬化劑(b2)) 熱硬化劑(b2),作用為對環氧樹脂(b1)的硬化劑。 作為熱硬化劑(b2),例如1分子中具有2個以上與環氧基能夠反應的官能基之化合物。作為上述官能基,例如,苯酚性羥基、乙醇性羥基、氨基、羧 (carboxy) 基、酸基的酐化基等,理想是苯酚(phenol)性羥基、氨基或酸基的酐化基,更理想是苯酚(phenol)性羥基、氨基。(Thermohardener (b2)) The thermosetting agent (b2) acts as a curing agent for the epoxy resin (b1). The thermosetting agent (b2) is, for example, a compound having two or more functional groups capable of reacting with epoxy groups in one molecule. As the above-mentioned functional group, for example, a phenolic hydroxyl group, an alcoholic hydroxyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an anhydrided group of an acid group, etc., preferably an anhydrided group of a phenolic hydroxyl group, an amino group, or an acid group, more preferably Ideally, it is a phenolic hydroxyl group or an amino group.

熱硬化劑(b2)中,作為具有苯酚(phenol)性羥基的苯酚系硬化劑,例如,多官能苯酚樹脂、雙苯酚(biphenol)、酚醛清漆(novolak)型苯酚樹脂、二環戊二烯(dicyclopentadiene)型苯酚樹脂、芳烷基(aralkyl)型苯酚樹脂等。 熱硬化劑(b2)中,作為具有氨基的氨基系硬化劑,例如雙氰胺(dicyandiamide(DICY))等。Among the thermosetting agents (b2), as the phenolic curing agent having a phenolic hydroxyl group, for example, polyfunctional phenol resin, biphenol (biphenol), novolac (novolak) type phenol resin, dicyclopentadiene ( dicyclopentadiene) type phenol resin, aralkyl type phenol resin and the like. Among the thermosetting agents (b2), dicyandiamide (DICY) and the like are examples of the amino-based curing agent having an amino group.

接合劑組合物及膜狀接合劑含有的熱硬化劑(b2),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The thermosetting agent (b2) contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

接合劑組合物及膜狀接合劑中,熱硬化劑(b2)的含有量,對於環氧樹脂(b1)的含有量100質量份,理想是0.1〜500質量份。In the adhesive composition and film adhesive, the content of the thermosetting agent (b2) is preferably 0.1 to 500 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the epoxy resin (b1) content.

接合劑組合物及膜狀接合劑中,環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)的含有量(環氧樹脂(b1)及熱硬化劑(b2)的總含有量),對於聚合物成分(a) 的含有量100質量份,理想是5〜100質量份。In the adhesive composition and the film adhesive, the content of the epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b) (the total content of the epoxy resin (b1) and the thermosetting agent (b2)) is different from that of the polymer component (a ) content of 100 parts by mass, ideally 5 to 100 parts by mass.

上述膜狀接合劑,為了改良其各種物理性質,聚合物成分(a)及環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)以外,還根據需要,含有不符合這些的其它成分也可以。 作為上述膜狀接合劑含有的其它成分,例如,硬化促進劑(c)、填充材(d)、耦合劑(e)、交聯劑(f)、能量線硬化性樹脂(g)、感光聚合起始劑(h)、通用添加劑(i)等。這些之中,作為理想的上述其它成分,舉出硬化促進劑(c)、填充材(d)、耦合劑(e)、通用添加劑(i)。In order to improve various physical properties, the above-mentioned film adhesive may contain other components other than the polymer component (a) and the epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b) if necessary. Other components contained in the above-mentioned film adhesive include, for example, curing accelerator (c), filler (d), coupling agent (e), crosslinking agent (f), energy ray curable resin (g), photopolymerization Starter (h), general additives (i), etc. Among these, ideal examples of the aforementioned other components include a curing accelerator (c), a filler (d), a coupling agent (e), and a general-purpose additive (i).

[硬化促進劑(c)] 硬化促進劑(c),用以調節接合劑組成物的硬化速度的成分。作為理想的硬化促進劑(c) ,例如,三乙烯二胺(triethylenediamine)、苯甲基二甲基胺(benzyldimethylamine)、三乙醇胺(triethanolamine)、二甲氨乙醇(dimethylaminoethanol)、三(二甲基氨甲基)酚(tris dimethyl aminomethyl phenol)等第3級胺;2-甲基咪唑(2-methylimidazole)、2-苯基咪唑(2-phenylimidazole)、2-苯基-4-甲基咪唑(2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole)、2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑(2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxy methylimidazole)、2-苯基-4-甲基-5-羥甲基咪唑(2-phenyl-4-methyl-5-hydroxy methylimidazole)等咪唑類(1個以上的氫原子以氫原子以外的基置換之咪唑);三丁膦(tributyl phosphine)、二苯膦(diphenyl phosphine)、三苯膦(triphenyl phosphine)等有機膦(phosphine)類(1個以上的氫原子以有機基置換之膦(phosphine));四苯硼四苯膦(tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate)、四苯硼三苯膦(triphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate)等四苯硼(tetraphenylboron)鹽;以上述咪唑類作為客體化合物的晶籠化合物等。[hardening accelerator (c)] The hardening accelerator (c) is a component for adjusting the hardening speed of the cement composition. As ideal hardening accelerator (c), for example, triethylenediamine (triethylenediamine), benzyldimethylamine (benzyldimethylamine), triethanolamine (triethanolamine), dimethylaminoethanol (dimethylaminoethanol), tris(dimethyl Aminomethyl) phenol (tris dimethyl aminomethyl phenol) and other tertiary amines; 2-methylimidazole (2-methylimidazole), 2-phenylimidazole (2-phenylimidazole), 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole ( 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole), 2-phenyl-4,5-dimethylimidazole (2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxy methylimidazole), 2-phenyl-4-methyl-5-hydroxymethyl Imidazoles such as 2-phenyl-4-methyl-5-hydroxy methylimidazole (imidazoles in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by groups other than hydrogen atoms); tributyl phosphine, diphenyl phosphine Phosphine), triphenylphosphine and other organic phosphine (phosphine with more than one hydrogen atom replaced by an organic group); tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate, tetraphenylborontriphenylphosphine Tetraphenylboron salts such as triphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate; crystal cage compounds using the above-mentioned imidazoles as guest compounds; and the like.

接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑含有的硬化促進劑(c),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The curing accelerator (c) contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive may be of only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

使用硬化促進劑(c)時,接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑中,硬化促進劑(c)的含有量,對於環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)的含有量100質量份,理想是 0.01〜10質量份。When the hardening accelerator (c) is used, the content of the hardening accelerator (c) in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive is preferably 100 parts by mass of the content of the epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b). 0.01 to 10 parts by mass.

填充材(d) 膜狀接合劑,由於含有填充材(d),其熱膨脹係數的調整變得容易,藉由對膜狀接合劑的黏貼對象物最優化此熱膨脹係數,更提高使用膜狀接合劑得到的封裝可靠性,又,由於膜狀接合劑含有填充材(d),也可以又降低硬化後膜狀接合劑的吸溼率又提高散熱性。filler (d) Since the film adhesive contains the filler (d), it is easy to adjust the thermal expansion coefficient. By optimizing the thermal expansion coefficient for the object to be pasted with the film adhesive, the reliability of the package obtained by using the film adhesive is further improved. Moreover, since the film adhesive contains the filler (d), it is also possible to reduce the moisture absorption rate of the cured film adhesive and improve heat dissipation.

填充材(d),有機填充材及無機填充材都可以,但理想是無機填充材。 作為理想的無機填充材,例如,二氧化矽(silica)、氧化鋁(alumina)、滑石(talc)、碳酸鈣(calcium carbonate)、鈦白(titanium white)、鐵丹(red oxide)、碳化矽(silicon carbide)、氮化硼(boron nitride)等粉末;球形化這些無機填充材料的珠粒;這些無機填充材的表面改質品;這些無機填充材的單結晶纖維;玻璃纖維等。 這些之中,無機填充材理想是二氧化矽(silica)或氧化鋁(alumina)。The filler (d) may be an organic filler or an inorganic filler, but is preferably an inorganic filler. As an ideal inorganic filler, for example, silica (silica), alumina (alumina), talc (talc), calcium carbonate (calcium carbonate), titanium white (titanium white), iron oxide (red oxide), silicon carbide (silicon carbide), boron nitride and other powders; spheroidized beads of these inorganic fillers; surface modified products of these inorganic fillers; single crystal fibers of these inorganic fillers; glass fibers, etc. Among these, the inorganic filler is preferably silicon dioxide (silica) or aluminum oxide (alumina).

接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑含有的填充材(d),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The filler (d) contained in the adhesive composition and the film-like adhesive may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

使用填充材(d)時,接合劑組成物中,對於溶媒以外的全部成分總含有量之填充材(d)含有量比例(即,膜狀接合劑中,對於膜狀接合劑總質量的填充材(d)含有量比例)理想是5〜80質量%。When the filler (d) is used, the content ratio of the filler (d) to the total content of all components other than the solvent in the adhesive composition (that is, in the film adhesive, the filling ratio of the total mass of the film adhesive to the total mass of the film adhesive) Material (d) content ratio) is ideally 5 to 80% by mass.

[耦合劑(e)] 膜狀接合劑,由於含有耦合劑(e),提高對黏著物的接合性及密合性。又,由於膜狀接合劑含有耦合劑(e),其硬化物不損壞耐熱性,提高耐水性。耦合劑(e),具有可與無機化合物或有機化合物反應的官能機。[Coupling agent (e)] Since the film-like adhesive contains the coupling agent (e), the adhesiveness and adhesiveness to the adherend are improved. In addition, since the film-like adhesive contains the coupling agent (e), its hardened product does not impair heat resistance and improves water resistance. The coupling agent (e) has a functional machine capable of reacting with an inorganic compound or an organic compound.

耦合劑(e),理想是可與聚合物成分(a)、環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)等具有的官能基反應的官能基之化合物,更理想是矽烷耦合劑。The coupling agent (e) is preferably a compound having a functional group that can react with a functional group of the polymer component (a), epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b), and more preferably a silane coupling agent.

接合劑組合物及膜狀接合劑具有的耦合劑(e),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The coupling agent (e) contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

使用耦合劑(e)時,接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑中,耦合劑(e)含有量,對於聚合物成分(a)及環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)的總含有量100質量份,理想是0.03〜20質量份。When using the coupling agent (e), the content of the coupling agent (e) in the adhesive composition and the film-like adhesive is 100% relative to the total content of the polymer component (a) and the epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b). Parts by mass, ideally 0.03 to 20 parts by mass.

[交聯劑(f)] 作為聚合物成分(a),使用具有與上述丙烯酸樹脂等其它化合物可結合的乙烯基(vinyl)、丙烯醯基((meth)acryloyl)、胺基(amino)、羥基(hydroxyl)、羧基(carboxy)、異氰酸基(isocyanate)等官能基時,接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑,含有使上述官能基與其它化合物結合交聯的交聯劑(f)也可以。由於利用交聯劑(f)交聯,可以調節膜狀接合劑的初期接合力及凝聚力。[Crosslinking agent (f)] As the polymer component (a), there are used vinyl, acryloyl ((meth)acryloyl), amino, hydroxyl, carboxy ), isocyanate and other functional groups, the adhesive composition and the film-like adhesive may contain a crosslinking agent (f) that binds and crosslinks the above functional groups with other compounds. By crosslinking with the crosslinking agent (f), the initial bonding strength and cohesive strength of the film-shaped adhesive can be adjusted.

作為交聯劑(f),例如,有機多價異氰酸化合物、有機多價亞胺化合物、金屬鉗合物(chelate)交聯劑(具有金屬鉗合物構造的交聯劑)、氮丙啶(aziridine) 交聯劑( 具有氮丙啶基(aziridinyl)的交聯劑)等。As the crosslinking agent (f), for example, an organic polyvalent isocyanate compound, an organic polyvalent imine compound, a metal chelate crosslinking agent (a crosslinking agent having a metal chelate structure), aziridine Aziridine crosslinking agent (crosslinking agent having an aziridinyl group) and the like.

作為交聯劑(f),使用有機多價異氰酸化合物時,作為聚合物成分(a),理想是使用含羥基(hydroxyl)聚合物。交聯劑(f)具有異氰酸基(isocyanate),聚合物成分(a)具有羥基(hydroxyl)時,由於交聯劑(f)與聚合物成分(a)的反應,可以容易導入交聯構造至膜狀接合劑內。When an organic polyvalent isocyanate compound is used as the crosslinking agent (f), it is desirable to use a hydroxyl group (hydroxyl)-containing polymer as the polymer component (a). When the crosslinking agent (f) has an isocyanate group (isocyanate) and the polymer component (a) has a hydroxyl group (hydroxyl), crosslinking can be easily introduced due to the reaction between the crosslinking agent (f) and the polymer component (a). Constructed into film cement.

接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑含有的交聯劑(f),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The crosslinking agent (f) contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive may be one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

使用交聯劑(f)時,接合劑組成物中,交聯劑(f)的含有量,對於聚合物成分(a)的含有量100質量份,理想是0.01〜20質量份。When using the crosslinking agent (f), the content of the crosslinking agent (f) in the adhesive composition is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component (a) content.

[能量線硬化性樹脂(g)] 膜狀接合劑,由於含有能量線硬化性樹脂(g),可以利用能量線的照射改變特性。[energy ray curable resin (g)] Since the film adhesive contains an energy ray curable resin (g), its properties can be changed by irradiation of energy ray.

能量線硬化性樹脂(g),係聚合(硬化)能量線硬化性化合物得到。 作為上述能量線硬化性化合物,例如,分子內具有至少1個聚合性雙重結合的化合物,理想是具有丙烯醯基((meth)acryloyl)的丙烯酸 ((meth)acrylate)化合物。The energy ray curable resin (g) is obtained by polymerizing (curing) an energy ray curable compound. As the above-mentioned energy ray curable compound, for example, a compound having at least one polymerizable double bond in the molecule is preferably an acrylic (meth)acrylate compound having an acryl group ((meth)acryloyl).

接合劑組成物含有的能量線硬化性樹脂(g),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The energy ray-curable resin (g) contained in the adhesive composition may be only one type, or two or more types may be used, and in the case of two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

使用能量線硬化性樹脂(g)時,接合劑組成物中,對於接合劑組成物總質量的能量線硬化性樹脂(g)含有量比例,理想是1〜95質量%。When the energy ray-curable resin (g) is used, the content ratio of the energy ray-curable resin (g) in the cement composition to the total mass of the cement composition is preferably 1 to 95% by mass.

[感光聚合起始劑(h)] 接合劑組成物,含有能量線硬化性樹脂(g)時,為了高效率進行能量線硬化性樹脂(g)的聚合反應,含有感光聚合起始劑(h)也可以。[Photopolymerization initiator (h)] When the adhesive composition contains the energy ray curable resin (g), it may contain a photopolymerization initiator (h) in order to efficiently carry out the polymerization reaction of the energy ray curable resin (g).

作為接合劑組成物中的感光聚合起始劑(h),例如,與之前說明的黏合劑組成物(I-1)〜(I-3)的含有成分感光聚合起始劑相同。The photopolymerization initiator (h) in the adhesive composition is, for example, the same as the photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) described above.

接合劑組成物含有的感光聚合起始劑(h),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。The photopolymerization initiator (h) contained in the adhesive composition may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

使用感光聚合起始劑(h)時,接合劑組成物中,感光聚合起始劑(h)的含有量,對於能量線硬化性樹脂(g)的含有量100質量份,理想是0.1〜20質量份。When using a photopolymerization initiator (h), the content of the photopolymerization initiator (h) in the adhesive composition is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the energy ray-curable resin (g). parts by mass.

通用添加劑(i) 通用添加劑(i),眾所周知的也可以,根據目的可以任意選擇,不特別限定。作為理想的通用添加劑(i),例如,可塑劑、帶電防止劑、氧化防止劑、著色劑(染料、顏料)、吸除(gettering)劑等。General Additives (i) The general-purpose additive (i) may be well known, and may be arbitrarily selected according to the purpose, and is not particularly limited. As desirable general-purpose additives (i), for example, plasticizers, antistatic agents, antioxidation agents, colorants (dyes, pigments), gettering agents, and the like.

接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑含有的通用添加劑(i),只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。 接合劑組成物及膜狀接合劑含有的通用添加劑(i)的含有量,不特別限定,根據目的適當選擇即可。The general-purpose additive (i) contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive may be only one type, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily. The content of the general-purpose additive (i) contained in the adhesive composition and the film adhesive is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose.

[溶媒] 接合劑組成物,理想是更包含溶媒。含有溶媒的接合劑組成物,變得使用性良好。 不特別限定上述溶媒,但作為理想的溶媒,例如甲苯(toluene)、二甲苯(xylene)等碳水化合物;甲醇(methanol)、乙醇(ethanol)、2-二異丙巴比土酸(2-proponal)、異丁醇(isobutyl alcohol)(2-甲基丙烷-1-醇) (2-methylpropane-1-ol)、1-丁醇(1-butanol)等醇(alcohol)類;醋酸乙酯(ethyl acetate)等酯(ester)類;丙酮(acetone)、甲基乙基酮(methyl ethyl ketone)等酮類(ketone);四氫呋喃(tetrahydrofuran)等醚(ether)類;二甲基甲酰胺(dimethylformamide)、甲基吡咯烷酮(N-methylpyrrolidone)等胺化物(amide)(具有醯胺鍵(amide bond)的化合物)等。 接合劑組成物含有的溶媒,只1種也可以,2種以上也可以,2種以上時,可以任意選擇這些組合及比率。[solvent] The cement composition preferably further contains a solvent. The adhesive composition containing the solvent has good usability. The above-mentioned solvent is not particularly limited, but as an ideal solvent, for example, carbohydrates such as toluene (toluene) and xylene (xylene); methanol (methanol), ethanol (ethanol), 2-diisopropylbarbituric acid (2-proponal ), isobutyl alcohol (2-methylpropane-1-ol) (2-methylpropane-1-ol), 1-butanol (1-butanol) and other alcohols (alcohol); ethyl acetate ( Esters such as ethyl acetate; Ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone; Ethers such as tetrahydrofuran; Dimethylformamide ), methylpyrrolidone (N-methylpyrrolidone) and other amides (amides (compounds having an amide bond)) and the like. The solvent contained in the bonding agent composition may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and in case of two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be selected arbitrarily.

接合劑組成物含有的溶媒,根據可以更均勻混合接合劑組成物中的含有成分方面,理想是甲基乙基酮(methyl ethyl ketone)等。The solvent contained in the cement composition is desirably methyl ethyl ketone (methyl ethyl ketone) or the like because the components contained in the cement composition can be more uniformly mixed.

○接合劑組成物的製造方法 接合劑組成物,藉由配合構成此的各成分得到。 接合劑組成物,除了配合成分不同方面以外,可以利用與先前說明的接合劑組成物的情況相同的方法製造。○Method for producing cement composition The cement composition is obtained by blending the components constituting it. The cement composition can be produced by the same method as that of the cement composition described above except that the ingredients are different.

>作為拾起方法(1)用適當的黏晶片(1)-1> 上述拾起步驟中,適於應用之前說明的拾起方法(1)時使用的一實施形態的黏晶片,在支撐片與膜狀接合劑的界面中的剝離力是0.02〜0.2N/25mm,且硬化前的膜狀接合劑堆積成合計厚度200μm(微米)得到的試驗片斷裂延伸度,成為450%以下(以下,有時稱作「黏晶片(1)-1」)。透過使用滿足這樣的斷裂延伸度條件之黏晶片(1)-1,拾起步驟中應用拾起方法(1)時,透過對於製作後的上述積層物(即,半導體晶片群與黏晶片(1)-1的積層物)施力,可以更輕易切斷積層物中的膜狀接合劑。又,透過使用滿足這樣的剝離力條件之黏晶片(1)-1,拾起步驟中應用拾起方法(1)時,將備置切斷後的膜狀接合劑之半導體晶片,不伴隨步驟異常,可以輕易從支撐片拉開,附膜狀接合劑半導體晶片的拾起,變得更容易。 作為滿足這樣的剝離力及斷裂延伸度條件之黏晶片(1)-1,舉出「國際公開第2016/140248號」中揭示的膜狀接合劑複合片。>As a pick-up method (1) with a suitable die stick (1)-1> In the above-mentioned pick-up step, the die bonder of one embodiment suitable for use when the pick-up method (1) described above is applied has a peeling force of 0.02 to 0.2 N/25mm at the interface between the support sheet and the film-like adhesive, And the elongation at break of the test piece obtained by depositing the film-like adhesive before hardening to a total thickness of 200 μm (micrometer) was 450% or less (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "chip bonding (1)-1"). By using the bonded die (1)-1 satisfying such elongation at break condition, when the pick-up method (1) is applied in the pick-up step, by using the above-mentioned laminate (ie, the semiconductor die group and the bonded die (1) )-1 laminate) Applying force can cut the film-like adhesive in the laminate more easily. In addition, by using the bonded wafer (1)-1 satisfying such a peeling force condition, when the pick-up method (1) is applied in the pick-up step, the semiconductor wafer with the film-like bonding agent after cutting is not accompanied by abnormality in the step, It can be easily pulled away from the support sheet, making it easier to pick up semiconductor wafers with film-like bonding agent. The film-like adhesive composite sheet disclosed in "International Publication No. 2016/140248" is mentioned as a die-attach (1)-1 which satisfies such conditions of peeling force and elongation at break.

[硬化前的膜狀接合劑的試驗片斷裂延伸度] 硬化前的上述試驗片的斷裂延伸度(張力斷裂延伸度),在450%以下,更顯著得到上述效果方面,例如445%以下也可以。 另一方面,硬化前的上述試驗片的斷裂延伸度下限值,不特別限定。但是,可以更穩定使用黏晶片(1)-1方面,上述斷裂延伸度理想是50%以上,例如,100%以上也可以。[Elongation at break of test piece of film adhesive before hardening] The elongation at break (elongation at break under tension) of the test piece before hardening may be 450% or less, for example, 445% or less to obtain the above-mentioned effect more remarkably. On the other hand, the lower limit value of the elongation at break of the test piece before curing is not particularly limited. However, the above-mentioned elongation at break is preferably 50% or more, for example, 100% or more, in order to allow more stable use of the die-bonding (1)-1.

硬化前上述試驗片斷裂延伸度,在任意組合設定上述理想的下限值及上限值的範圍內,可以適當調節。例如,一實施形態中,上述斷裂延伸度,理想50〜450%,100〜445%也可以。The above-mentioned elongation at break of the test piece before hardening can be appropriately adjusted within the range in which the above-mentioned ideal lower limit and upper limit are set in any combination. For example, in one embodiment, the elongation at break is preferably 50 to 450%, but may be 100 to 445%.

本說明書中,所謂「斷裂延伸度是X%(式中,X是正數)」,意味後述的測量方法中,拉伸上述試驗片,試驗片在其拉伸方向只延伸原長度(換言之,沒拉伸時的長度)的X%長度時,即,試驗片在拉伸方向中的全體長度,成為拉伸前長度的[1+X/100]倍時,試驗片斷裂。In this specification, the so-called "elongation at break is X% (in the formula, X is a positive number)" means that in the measurement method described later, when the above-mentioned test piece is stretched, the test piece is only extended by the original length in the stretching direction (in other words, without When the length of X% of the stretched length), that is, the overall length of the test piece in the stretching direction becomes [1+X/100] times the length before stretching, the test piece breaks.

本說明書中,膜狀接合劑或將此積層得到的積層體所有的斷裂延伸度,包含上述試驗片的斷裂延伸度,根據JIS K7161-1994(ISO 527-1)或JIS K7127:1999(ISO 527-3)求出。測量對象物(試驗片)沒有降服點時,測量拉伸破壞變形,具有降服點時,測量拉伸破壞時引起的變形,利用這些測量值,求出斷裂延伸度。In this specification, all the elongation at break of the film adhesive or the laminate obtained by laminating it, including the elongation at break of the above-mentioned test piece, is based on JIS K7161-1994 (ISO 527-1) or JIS K7127:1999 (ISO 527 -3) find out. When the measurement object (test piece) has no yield point, the tensile failure deformation is measured, and when it has a yield point, the deformation caused by tensile failure is measured, and the elongation at break is obtained using these measured values.

上述試驗片的斷裂延伸度,換言之,上述膜狀接合劑的斷裂延伸度,藉由調節膜狀接合劑含有成分的種類及量,可以適當調節。例如,膜狀接合劑含有成分即前述聚合物成分(a)的分子量或含有量;構成環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)的成分構造、軟化點或含有量;藉由調節填充材(d)含有量等,可以調節試驗片的斷裂延伸度。但是,這些不過是試驗片的斷裂延伸度調節方法的一例。The elongation at break of the test piece, in other words, the elongation at break of the film adhesive, can be appropriately adjusted by adjusting the types and amounts of components contained in the film adhesive. For example, the molecular weight or content of the above-mentioned polymer component (a) contained in the film adhesive; the component structure, softening point or content of the epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b); by adjusting the filler (d ) content, etc., can adjust the elongation at break of the test piece. However, these are just examples of methods for adjusting the elongation at break of the test piece.

上述試驗片,只要是由膜狀接合劑製作的厚度200μm(微米)即可,例如,為了製作試驗片積層的複數枚膜狀接合劑厚度,不特別限定。但是,理想是使用與上述拾起步驟使用的黏晶片(1)-1中包含的膜狀接合劑相同厚度的膜狀接合劑,製作上述試驗片。The above-mentioned test piece is not particularly limited as long as it is made of a film-like adhesive and has a thickness of 200 μm (micrometer). However, it is desirable to produce the above-mentioned test piece using a film-shaped bonding agent having the same thickness as the film-shaped bonding agent included in the die bonding (1)-1 used in the above-mentioned pick-up step.

上述膜狀接合劑,因為其厚度越厚斷裂延伸度越大,厚度不滿200μm的膜狀接合劑的試驗片的斷裂延伸度在450%以下的話,相同組成且厚度200μm的膜狀接合劑的試驗片斷裂延伸度也當然在450%以下。The elongation at break of the above-mentioned film adhesive is greater as its thickness is thicker, and if the elongation at break of the test piece of the film adhesive with a thickness of less than 200 μm is 450% or less, the test of a film adhesive with the same composition and a thickness of 200 μm The elongation at break of the sheet is of course also 450% or less.

上述斷裂延伸度,例如,試驗片,寬度15mm、長度100mm、 厚度200μm,固定在兩處使固定處所間的距離為75mm(毫米),拉伸速度為200mm/min(毫米/分),在此固定處所間拉伸上述試驗片,藉由測量試驗片斷裂時試驗片的延伸求出。The above-mentioned elongation at break, for example, test piece, width 15mm, length 100mm, thickness 200μm, is fixed in two places so that the distance between the fixed places is 75mm (mm), and the tensile speed is 200mm/min (mm/min). Stretch the above-mentioned test piece between fixed places, and obtain it by measuring the elongation of the test piece when the test piece breaks.

[支持片與膜狀接合劑的界面中的剝離力] 上述支持片與上述膜狀接合劑的界面中的剝離力,是0.02〜0.2N/25mm,理想是0.02〜0.15N/25mm,更理想是0.02〜0.1N/25mm。由於上述剝離力在上述下限值以上,上述拾起步驟中,將半導體晶片隨著膜狀接合劑(更具體而言,切斷後的膜狀接合劑)也從支撐片拉開時,膜狀接合劑抑制同時從支撐片剝離不止是拉開對象的目標半導體晶片備置之物,還有相鄰此半導體晶片之物等,也有目標外的半導體晶片備置之物的現象。又,由於上述剝離力在上述上限值以下,將半導體晶片隨著膜狀接合劑也從支撐片拉開時,目標半導體晶片備置的膜狀接合劑,也確實從支撐片剝離。這樣,因為確實剝離,例如,對上述積層物(例如,積層物801等)施力時,嚴加限制條件(例如,施力的上述頂起部加速頂起速度)等,拾起時的條件不需要變更,抑制進行這樣的變更時看到的半導體晶片破裂等發生。[Peel force at the interface between the support sheet and the film adhesive] The peel force at the interface between the support sheet and the film adhesive is 0.02 to 0.2 N/25mm, preferably 0.02 to 0.15 N/25mm, more preferably 0.02 to 0.1N/25mm. Since the above-mentioned peeling force is above the above-mentioned lower limit value, in the above-mentioned pick-up step, when the semiconductor wafer is pulled away from the support sheet along with the film-like adhesive (more specifically, the film-like adhesive after cutting), the film-like The bonding agent suppresses simultaneous peeling from the support sheet not only from the object of the target semiconductor wafer, but also from the adjacent semiconductor wafer, and also from the non-target semiconductor wafer. In addition, since the above-mentioned peeling force is below the above-mentioned upper limit, when the semiconductor wafer is pulled away from the support sheet along with the film-form adhesive, the film-form adhesive provided on the target semiconductor wafer is surely peeled from the support sheet. Like this, because delamination is sure, for example, when above-mentioned laminate (for example, laminate 801 etc.) is applied force, strictly limit condition (for example, above-mentioned jack-up part of exerting force accelerates jack-up speed) etc., the condition when picking up Changes are not required, and the occurrence of semiconductor wafer cracks and the like seen when such changes are made is suppressed.

上述剝離力,例如,上述膜狀接合劑含有成分的種類及量;構成設置上述支撐片的膜狀接合劑的面之材料;藉由調節設置上述支撐片的膜狀接合劑的面的狀態(表面狀態)等,可以適當調節。但是,這些只不過是上述剝離力調節方法的一例。 又,膜狀接合劑,上述斷裂延伸度大時,上述剝離力也變大,上述斷裂延伸度小時,上述剝離力也傾向變小。The above-mentioned peeling force, for example, the type and amount of components contained in the above-mentioned film adhesive; the material constituting the surface of the film adhesive on which the above-mentioned support sheet is provided; Surface state), etc., can be adjusted appropriately. However, these are merely examples of the method for adjusting the peeling force described above. In addition, in a film-like adhesive, when the above-mentioned elongation at break is large, the above-mentioned peeling force also becomes large, and when the above-mentioned elongation at break is small, the above-mentioned peeling force also tends to be small.

支撐片的上述表面狀態,例如,藉由施行作為提高與基材其它層的密合性事先進行的表面處理,即噴砂處理、溶劑處理等的凹凸化處理;電暈放電處理、電子線照射處理、電漿處理、臭氧.紫外線照射處理、火焰處理、鉻酸處理、熱風處理等氧化處理;打底處理等,可以調節。The above-mentioned surface state of the support sheet can be obtained by, for example, performing a surface treatment previously performed to improve the adhesion with other layers of the base material, that is, roughening treatment such as sandblasting treatment, solvent treatment, etc.; corona discharge treatment, electron beam irradiation treatment, etc. , Plasma treatment, ozone. UV irradiation treatment, flame treatment, chromic acid treatment, hot air treatment and other oxidation treatments; primer treatment, etc., can be adjusted.

上述剝離力,利用以下的方法求得。 即,把寬度25mm且長度任意的黏晶片(1)-1,以其膜狀接合劑黏貼至黏著物的狀態,從黏貼至黏著物的膜狀接合劑以剝離速度300mm/min剝離支撐片時,膜狀接合劑及支撐片互相接觸的面之間形成180°的角度,測量往其長度方向(黏晶片(1)-1的長度方向)剝離(進行180°剝離)支撐片時施加的力(剝離力)。於是,以此測量值作為上述剝離力。提供測量的黏晶片(1)-1長度,只要在可以穩定檢出測量力道的範圍內,不特別限定,但理想是200〜300mm。上述剝離力可以在溫度25℃、相對溼度50%的條件下測量。又,測量之際,黏貼黏晶片(1)-1至黏著物的狀態,理想是將此在溫度25℃、相對溼度50%的條件下靜置30分鐘,先穩定黏晶片(1)-1的黏貼狀態。The above-mentioned peeling force was obtained by the following method. That is, when the adhesive wafer (1)-1 with a width of 25 mm and an arbitrary length is attached to the adhesive with its film adhesive, and the support sheet is peeled off at a peeling speed of 300 mm/min from the film adhesive attached to the adhesive 180° angle is formed between the contacting surfaces of the film adhesive and the support sheet, and the force applied when the support sheet is peeled off (180° peeled off) in the longitudinal direction (the length direction of the bonded chip (1)-1) is measured (Peel force). Then, this measured value was used as the above-mentioned peeling force. The length of the bonded wafer (1)-1 provided for measurement is not particularly limited as long as it is within the range where the measurement force can be stably detected, but is ideally 200-300 mm. The above-mentioned peeling force can be measured under the conditions of a temperature of 25° C. and a relative humidity of 50%. In addition, when measuring, stick the wafer (1)-1 to the state of the adhesive, ideally let it stand for 30 minutes at a temperature of 25°C and a relative humidity of 50%, and stabilize the wafer (1)-1 first. Paste state.

膜狀接合劑的厚度,如先前說明,黏晶片(1)-1中,例如,理想是1〜50μm、更想理是3〜25μm、又更理想是5〜15μm也可以。由於膜狀接合劑厚度在上述下限值以上,對黏著物(半導體晶片)的膜狀接合劑的接合力,變更高。由於膜狀接合劑厚度在上述上限值以下,上述拾起步驟中,可以更輕易切斷膜狀接合劑。The thickness of the film bonding agent may be, for example, preferably 1 to 50 μm, more preferably 3 to 25 μm, and more preferably 5 to 15 μm in the die bonding (1)-1 as described above. Since the thickness of the film-form bonding agent is more than the said lower limit, the bonding force of the film-form bonding agent with respect to an adherend (semiconductor wafer) becomes high. Since the thickness of the film-shaped adhesive is not more than the above-mentioned upper limit, the film-shaped adhesive can be cut more easily in the above-mentioned pick-up step.

>作為拾起方法(1)用適合的黏晶片(1)-2> 上述拾起步驟中,作為適合應用先前說明的拾起方法(1)時使用的一實施形態的黏晶片,具有基材的支撐片上,設置厚度1〜50μm硬化性膜狀接合劑,對於硬化前上述膜狀接合劑的半導體晶圓之接合力為接合力K(N/24mm),硬化前上述膜狀接合劑積層成為合計厚度200μm的試驗片之斷裂延伸度為斷裂延伸度L(%),以上述試驗片的斷裂強度為斷裂強度Q(MPa)時,也舉出滿足式(E1): 的關係之黏晶片(以下,有時稱作「黏晶片(1)-2」)。透過利用滿足這樣的式(E1)關係之黏晶片(1)-2,拾起步驟中應用拾起方法(1)時,透過對製作後上述積層物(即,半導體晶片群與黏晶片(1)-2的積層物)施力,可以更輕易切斷積層物中的膜狀接合劑。又,拾起步驟中應用拾起方法(1)時,將備置切斷後的膜狀接合劑之半導體晶片,不伴隨步驟異常,可以更輕易從支撐片拉開,附膜狀接合劑之半導體晶片的拾起,變得更容易。 作為滿足這樣的剝離力及斷裂延伸度的條件之黏晶片(1)-2,舉出「國際公開第2017/145979」揭示的膜狀接合劑複合片。>A die-bonding method suitable for the pick-up method (1) (1)-2> In the above-mentioned pick-up step, as an embodiment of the die-bonding method suitable for use when the previously described pick-up method (1) is applied, there is a substrate A curable film-like adhesive with a thickness of 1 to 50 μm is placed on the support sheet. The bonding force of the semiconductor wafer with the above-mentioned film-like adhesive before hardening is the bonding force K (N/24mm). The elongation at break of the test piece with a total thickness of 200 μm is the elongation at break L (%), and when the breaking strength of the above test piece is taken as the breaking strength Q (MPa), it also satisfies the formula (E1): Chip bonding (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "chip bonding (1)-2"). By using the bonded chip (1)-2 satisfying the relationship of formula (E1), when the pick-up method (1) is applied in the pick-up step, the above-mentioned laminate (that is, the semiconductor chip group and the bonded chip (1) )-2 laminate) Applying force, the film-like adhesive in the laminate can be cut off more easily. Also, when the pick-up method (1) is applied in the pick-up step, the semiconductor wafer with the film-like bonding agent after cutting can be pulled away from the support sheet more easily without abnormality in the step, and the semiconductor wafer with the film-like bonding agent attached Picking up just got easier. The film adhesive composite sheet disclosed in "International Publication No. 2017/145979" is exemplified as the die bonding (1)-2 satisfying the conditions of such peeling force and elongation at break.

[對硬化前膜狀接合劑的半導體晶圓之接合力K] 對硬化前上述膜狀接合劑的半導體晶圓之接合力K(N/24mm),利用以下的方法求出。 即,製作寬度24mm且長度任意的膜狀接合劑及黏合帶的積層片。此積層片,成為黏合帶的黏合面上積層膜狀接合劑之物,作為黏合帶,例如,可以使用Nichiban社製(Cellotape(註冊商標)第405號)的寬度24mm之膠帶。其次,以加熱至60℃的膜狀接合劑,黏貼此積層片至半導體晶圓,黏合帶、膜狀接合劑及半導體晶圓依此順序,在這些厚度方向中積層,製作構成的積層體。製作後立刻以JIS Z0237 2009規定的標準環境下放置此積層體30分鐘後,從半導體晶圓,將膜狀接合劑及黏合帶的積層片,使膜狀接合劑及半導體晶圓互相接觸的面之間形成180°的角度,進行以剝離速度150mm/min剝下的所謂180°剝離。測量此時的剝離力,此測量值作為接合力K(N/24mm)。提供測量的上述積層片長度,只要在可以穩定測量剝離力的範圍內,不特別限定。[Adhesive force K to semiconductor wafer of film adhesive before hardening] The bonding force K (N/24 mm) of the above-mentioned film bonding agent to the semiconductor wafer before curing was obtained by the following method. That is, a laminated sheet of a film adhesive and an adhesive tape having a width of 24 mm and an arbitrary length was produced. The laminated sheet is formed by laminating a film-like adhesive on the adhesive surface of an adhesive tape. As the adhesive tape, for example, a tape with a width of 24 mm manufactured by Nichiban Co., Ltd. (Cellotape (registered trademark) No. 405) can be used. Next, stick this laminated sheet to a semiconductor wafer with a film-like adhesive heated to 60°C. The adhesive tape, film-like adhesive, and semiconductor wafer are laminated in these thickness directions in this order to produce a laminated body. Immediately after production, place the laminated body in the standard environment specified in JIS Z0237 2009 for 30 minutes, and then remove the laminated sheet of the film bonding agent and the adhesive tape from the semiconductor wafer, so that the surface of the film bonding agent and the semiconductor wafer is in contact with each other. An angle of 180° is formed between them, and so-called 180° peeling is performed at a peeling speed of 150 mm/min. The peeling force at this time was measured, and this measured value was taken as joining force K (N/24mm). The length of the above-mentioned laminated sheet to be measured is not particularly limited as long as it is within a range in which the peeling force can be stably measured.

接合力K,只要滿足上述式(E1)的關係,不特別限定,但理想是0.3N/24mm以上,更理想是0.4N/24mm以上。又,接合力K,例如,也可以在15N/24mm以下、11N/24mm以下以及7N/24mm以下其中任一。The joining force K is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the relationship of the above-mentioned formula (E1), but is preferably 0.3 N/24 mm or more, and more preferably 0.4 N/24 mm or more. Also, the joining force K may be, for example, any one of 15 N/24 mm or less, 11 N/24 mm or less, and 7 N/24 mm or less.

接合力K,在任意組合設定上述理想的下限值及上限值的範圍內,可以適當調節。 例如,一實施形態中,接合力K理想是0.3〜15N/24mm,更理想是0.3〜11N/24mm,又更理想是0.4〜7N/24mm。 又,一實施形態中,接合力K在0.45N/24mm以上、不滿10N/24mm也可以,0.45N/24mm以上、5.8N/24mm以下也可以。The joining force K can be appropriately adjusted within the range in which the aforementioned ideal lower limit and upper limit are set in any combination. For example, in one embodiment, the joining force K is desirably 0.3-15N/24mm, more desirably 0.3-11N/24mm, and still more desirably 0.4-7N/24mm. In addition, in one embodiment, the bonding force K may be 0.45 N/24 mm or more and less than 10 N/24 mm, or may be 0.45 N/24 mm or more and 5.8 N/24 mm or less.

膜狀接合劑的上述接合力K,藉由調節膜狀接合劑含有成分的種類及量、膜狀接合劑厚度、構成設置上述支撐片的膜狀接合劑的面之材料、此面的狀態(表面狀態)等,可以適當調節。 例如,藉由調節膜狀接合劑含有成分的上述耦合劑(e)種類或量,可以調節接合力K。 又,例如,支撐片的上述表面狀態,可以利用與先前說明的黏晶片(1)-1時相同的方法調節。 但是,這些,只不過是接合力K的調節方法的一例。The bonding force K of the film bonding agent can be adjusted by adjusting the types and amounts of components contained in the film bonding agent, the thickness of the film bonding agent, the material constituting the surface of the film bonding agent on which the above-mentioned support sheet is placed, and the state of the surface ( Surface state), etc., can be adjusted appropriately. For example, the bonding force K can be adjusted by adjusting the type or amount of the above-mentioned coupling agent (e) contained in the film bonding agent. Also, for example, the above-mentioned surface state of the support sheet can be adjusted by the same method as in the above-described bonding of the wafer (1)-1. However, these are merely examples of the method of adjusting the joining force K.

[硬化前膜狀接合劑的試驗片斷裂延伸度L] 黏晶片(1)-2中的上述斷裂延伸度L,與上述黏晶片(1)-1中的試驗片斷裂延伸度相同。[Elongation at break L of test piece of film cement before hardening] The above-mentioned elongation at break L in the die-bonding (1)-2 is the same as the elongation at break of the test piece in the above-mentioned die-bonding (1)-1.

斷裂延伸度L(%),只要滿足上述式(E1)的關係,就不特別限定。例如,一實施形態中,斷裂延伸度L,理想是1200%以下, 更理想是30〜1200%,又更理想是40〜1100%,特別理想是45〜1050%。由於斷裂延伸度L在上述上限值以下,上述拾起步驟中,可以更輕易切斷膜狀接合劑。 又,一實施形態中,斷裂延伸度L,理想是900%以下,更理想是700%以下,特別理想是500%以下,例如,30〜500%、40〜500% 、45〜500%及50〜440%等其中任一也可以。由於斷裂延伸度L在上述上限值以下,上述拾起步驟中,利用各種方式可以更輕易切斷膜狀接合劑。即,作為對於上述積層物施力的方法,不只是之前說明最一般的突出突起構成的頂起部的方法,採用移動滑軌構成的頂起部的方法,也可以更輕易切斷膜狀接合劑。The elongation at break L (%) is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the relationship of the above formula (E1). For example, in one embodiment, the elongation at break L is preferably 1200% or less, more preferably 30 to 1200%, still more preferably 40 to 1100%, and particularly preferably 45 to 1050%. Since the elongation at break L is not more than the above-mentioned upper limit, the film-shaped adhesive can be cut more easily in the above-mentioned pick-up step. Also, in one embodiment, the elongation at break L is preferably 900% or less, more preferably 700% or less, particularly preferably 500% or less, for example, 30 to 500%, 40 to 500%, 45 to 500%, and 50% ~440% etc. Any one is also possible. Since the breaking elongation L is below the above-mentioned upper limit, the film-shaped adhesive can be cut more easily by various means in the above-mentioned pick-up step. That is, as a method of applying force to the above-mentioned laminate, not only the method of the most general raised portion made of protrusions described above, but also the method of moving the raised portion made of slide rails can also be used to cut the film-shaped joint more easily. agent.

[硬化前膜狀接合劑的試驗片斷裂強度Q] 斷裂強度Q(MPa),在測量斷裂延伸度L(%)時,試驗片斷裂(被破壞)時的拉應力,即拉伸破壞應力,可以與斷裂延伸度L同時測量。[Test piece breaking strength Q of film cement before hardening] The breaking strength Q (MPa), when measuring the breaking elongation L (%), the tensile stress when the test piece is broken (destroyed), that is, the tensile failure stress, can be measured simultaneously with the breaking elongation L.

斷裂強度Q(MPa),只要滿足上述式(E1)的關係,不特別限定。 例如,一實施形態中,斷裂強度Q,理想是0.4〜17 MPa,更理想是0.5〜15 MPa,特別理想是0.6〜13 MPa。 又,一實施形態中,斷裂強度Q,也可以是0.8〜11 MPa,也可以是2.5〜11 MPa。The breaking strength Q (MPa) is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the relationship of the above formula (E1). For example, in one embodiment, the breaking strength Q is preferably 0.4 to 17 MPa, more preferably 0.5 to 15 MPa, and particularly preferably 0.6 to 13 MPa. Also, in one embodiment, the breaking strength Q may be 0.8 to 11 MPa, or 2.5 to 11 MPa.

[K/(L×Q)] [K/(L×Q)]值,在0.0005以上,理想是0.0006以上,更理想是0.0007以上。 另一方面,[K/(L×Q)]的上限值不特別限定。[K/(L×Q)]的值,例如0.0170以下、0.0140以下以及0.0115以下其中任一都可以,這些是K/(L×Q)值的一例。[K/(L×Q)] The [K/(L×Q)] value is at least 0.0005, preferably at least 0.0006, more preferably at least 0.0007. On the other hand, the upper limit of [K/(L×Q)] is not particularly limited. The value of [K/(L×Q)] may be, for example, any of 0.0170 or less, 0.0140 or less, and 0.0115 or less, and these are examples of K/(L×Q) values.

K/(L×Q)值,在任意組合設定上述理想下限值及上限值的範圍內,可以適當調節。 例如,一實施形態中,K/(L×Q)值也可以是0.0005〜0.0170、0.0006〜0.0140及0.0007〜0.0115其中任一。 又,一實施形態中,K/(L×Q)值在0.0008以上未達0.0125,以及0.0008〜0.0105其中任一也可以。The value of K/(L×Q) can be appropriately adjusted within the range in which the above-mentioned ideal lower limit and upper limit are set in any combination. For example, in one embodiment, the value of K/(L×Q) may be any one of 0.0005-0.0170, 0.0006-0.0140 and 0.0007-0.0115. Also, in one embodiment, the value of K/(L×Q) may be 0.0008 to 0.0125, and any of 0.0008 to 0.0105.

上述試驗片的斷裂延伸度L及斷裂強度Q,換言之,上述膜狀接合劑的斷裂延伸度及斷裂強度,藉由調節膜狀接合劑含有成分的種類及量,可以適當調節。例如,膜狀接合劑含有成分的上述聚合物成分(a)的分子量或含有量;構成環氧系熱硬化性樹脂(b)的成分構造、軟化點或含有量;藉由調節填充材(d)的含有量等,可以調節上述斷裂延伸度L及斷裂強度Q。 但是,這些只不過是斷裂延伸度L及斷裂強度Q的調節方法的一例。The breaking elongation L and breaking strength Q of the test piece, in other words, the breaking elongation and breaking strength of the film adhesive, can be appropriately adjusted by adjusting the types and amounts of components contained in the film adhesive. For example, the molecular weight or content of the above-mentioned polymer component (a) contained in the film adhesive; the component structure, softening point or content of the epoxy-based thermosetting resin (b); by adjusting the filler (d ) content, etc., can adjust the above-mentioned elongation at break L and strength at break Q. However, these are merely examples of methods for adjusting the elongation at break L and the strength at break Q.

膜狀接合劑的厚度,如同之前說明的,在黏晶片(1)-2中是1〜50μm,例如理想是3〜25μm(微米),更理想是5〜15μm也可以。由於膜狀接合劑的厚度在上述下限值以上,對黏著物(半導體晶片)的膜狀接合劑的接合力,變更高。由於膜狀接合劑的厚度在上述上限值以下,上述拾起步驟中,可以更容易切斷膜狀接合劑。 [實施例]The thickness of the film bonding agent is, as described above, 1 to 50 μm in the die bonding (1)-2, for example, preferably 3 to 25 μm (micrometer), more preferably 5 to 15 μm. Since the thickness of the film-form bonding agent is more than the said lower limit, the bonding force of the film-form bonding agent with respect to an adherend (semiconductor wafer) becomes high. Since the thickness of the film-shaped adhesive is not more than the above-mentioned upper limit, the film-shaped adhesive can be cut more easily in the above-mentioned pick-up step. [Example]

以下,根據具體的實施例,更詳細說明關於本發明。但是,本發明,在以下所示的實施例中,無任何限定。Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail based on specific examples. However, the present invention is not limited in any way by the Examples shown below.

>>半導體晶片的製造、半導體晶圓的評價>> [實施例1] 根據參照第3〜6圖說明的方法(第1實施形態),製造半導體晶片,並拾起。具體而言,如下。>>Manufacturing of semiconductor wafers, evaluation of semiconductor wafers>> [Example 1] According to the method (first embodiment) described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6, a semiconductor wafer is manufactured and picked up. Specifically, it is as follows.

[第1改質步驟、第2改質步驟] 8吋半導體晶圓(厚度725μm)的電路形成面上,黏貼Backglide tape(膠帶)(Lintec社製「Adwill E-3100TN」)。[1st modification step, 2nd modification step] Backglide tape (adhesive tape) ("Adwill E-3100TN" manufactured by Lintec Corporation) was pasted on the circuit formation surface of an 8-inch semiconductor wafer (thickness 725 μm).

其次,使用隱形晶圓切割 (Stealth dicing)(註冊商標) 雷射切割機(Laser saw)(Disco社製「DFL7361」,在上述半導體晶圓內部的第1區域中,且半導體晶圓的周緣部近旁的處所,從此半導體晶圓的背側面,透過以1W(瓦特)的輸出照射雷射光,離半導體晶圓的電路形成面85μm深度的位置,形成第1改質層。於是,對半導體晶圓的電路形成面平行的一方向中,一邊錯開雷射光的照射位置,一邊重複此局部第1改質層的形成,藉此形成1條線狀的第1改質層(第1改質步驟)。半導體晶圓的厚度方向中,第1改質層的擴大寬度(換言之,第1改質層的高度)約30μm。Next, use a Stealth dicing (registered trademark) laser saw ("DFL7361" manufactured by Disco Corporation) in the first area inside the semiconductor wafer and at the peripheral edge of the semiconductor wafer. In the nearby place, from the back side of the semiconductor wafer, the laser light is irradiated with an output of 1W (watt), and the first modified layer is formed at a position 85 μm deep from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer. Then, the semiconductor wafer In a direction parallel to the circuit formation surface, the formation of the partial first modified layer is repeated while shifting the irradiation position of the laser light, thereby forming a linear first modified layer (first modification step) In the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer, the expanded width of the first modified layer (in other words, the height of the first modified layer) is about 30 μm.

再接著,不改變光源,而從半導體晶圓的背面側,對此半導體晶圓內部的第2區域中,透過以1W(瓦特)的輸出照射雷射光,離半導體晶圓的背面85μm深度且第1改質層正上方的位置,形成第2改質層。此時,半導體晶圓中,比第1改質層更背面側,形成第2改質層。於是,與第1改質層形成時相同,對半導體晶圓的電路形成面平行的一方向中,一邊錯開雷射光的照射位置,一邊重複此局部第2改質層的形成,藉此形成1條線狀的第2改質層(第2改質步驟)。半導體晶圓的厚度方向中,第2改質層的擴大寬度(換言之,第2改質層的高度)約30μm。 本實施例中,Δ12 的平均值是555μm。Then, without changing the light source, from the back side of the semiconductor wafer, the second region inside the semiconductor wafer is irradiated with laser light at an output of 1W (Watt), at a depth of 85 μm from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer and at the second area. The position directly above the 1 modified layer forms the 2nd modified layer. At this time, the second modified layer is formed on the back side of the first modified layer in the semiconductor wafer. Then, similarly to the formation of the first modified layer, in a direction parallel to the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, while shifting the irradiation position of the laser light, the formation of the partial second modified layer is repeated, whereby a 1 A second modification layer in the form of a line (second modification step). In the thickness direction of the semiconductor wafer, the expanded width of the second modified layer (in other words, the height of the second modified layer) was about 30 μm. In this example, the average value of Δ12 is 555 μm.

這樣,形成各1條互相平行的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層後,還多數次重複進行這樣的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層的形成。此時,新形成的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層,對於已形成的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層調節成為平行。又,利用與目前為此相同的方法,新形成對於這樣多數的線狀第1改質層以90°的交叉角度交叉之多數線狀第1改質層以及對於多數的線狀第2改質層以90°的交叉角度交叉之多數線狀的第2改質層(以上,重複第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟)。這樣,遍及半導體晶圓全區,透過重複進行第1改質層及第2改質層的形成,在離半導體晶圓的電路形成面85μm深度的位置,網目狀形成第1改質層,在離半導體晶圓背面85μm深度的位置,網目狀形成第2改質層。 根據上述,得到已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓。 合計製作已形成這樣的第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。In this way, after the formation of each of the first and second modified layers in parallel to each other, the formation of the first and second modified layers in the linear form was repeated several times. At this time, the newly formed linear first modified layer and the second modified layer are adjusted to be parallel to the already formed linear first modified layer and the second modified layer. Also, using the same method as in the past, a plurality of linear first modified layers intersecting such a plurality of linear first modified layers at an intersection angle of 90° and a plurality of linear second modified layers are newly formed. A multi-line second modification layer in which layers intersect at a crossing angle of 90° (above, the first modification step and the second modification step are repeated). In this way, by repeating the formation of the first modified layer and the second modified layer over the entire area of the semiconductor wafer, the first modified layer is formed in a mesh shape at a position 85 μm deep from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer. At a depth of 85 μm from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, a second modified layer was formed in a mesh shape. As described above, a semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed was obtained. A total of five semiconductor wafers on which such a first modified layer and a second modified layer were formed were produced.

[半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果的確認] 關於上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,每1枚,測量彎曲大小。更具體而言,如下。 使半導體晶圓的電路形成面接觸平面,在上述平面上裝載此半導體晶圓。 其次,從旁目視觀察此狀態的半導體晶圓,測量半導體晶圓的外周與其正下方的上述平面的距離,其最大值為半導體晶圓的彎曲大小。 利用此方法,關於上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓全部,求出彎曲大小,採用其中的最大值作為最後半導體晶圓的彎曲大小。結果,本實施例中的半導體晶圓的彎曲大小,如表1所示,未達0.5mm(毫米)。即,顯著抑制本實施例中已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。 又,關於這些5枚半導體晶圓,與上述情況相反,使背面接觸平面,在上述平面上裝載此半導體晶圓,此外利用與上述相同的方法,從旁目視觀察此狀態的半導體晶圓。結果,半導體晶圓的外周與其正下方的上述平面之間不允許間隙。[Confirmation of bowing suppression effect of semiconductor wafer] For each of the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the magnitude of warpage was measured. More specifically, it is as follows. The circuit-forming surface of the semiconductor wafer is brought into contact with a flat surface, and the semiconductor wafer is mounted on the above-mentioned flat surface. Next, visually observe the semiconductor wafer in this state from the side, measure the distance between the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer and the above-mentioned plane directly below, and the maximum value is the curvature of the semiconductor wafer. By this method, warpage magnitudes were obtained for all five semiconductor wafers obtained above, and the maximum value among them was adopted as the warpage magnitude of the final semiconductor wafer. As a result, the curvature of the semiconductor wafer in this example was less than 0.5 mm (millimeter) as shown in Table 1. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed in the present example was significantly suppressed. Also, for these five semiconductor wafers, contrary to the above, the back surface was brought into contact with a flat surface, the semiconductor wafer was mounted on the above-mentioned flat surface, and the semiconductor wafer in this state was visually observed from the side by the same method as above. As a result, no gap is allowed between the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer and the above-mentioned plane directly below it.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 利用研磨機(Disco社製「DFG8760」),透過以搬送臂吸附上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓試著每次1枚搬送。於是,根據下列評價基準,評價半導體的搬送性。結果,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。此評價結果,和可搬送的半導體晶圓枚數一起顯示於表1。表1中的本項目的評價結果欄中「5/5」的記載,評價5枚半導體晶圓,意味不伴隨吸附異常,可以搬送5枚半導體晶圓全部。這樣的本欄記載內容,關於以後的實施例及比較例也相同。 (評價基準) A:可以不伴隨吸附異常搬送5枚半導體晶圓全部。 B:可以不伴隨吸附異常搬送1〜4枚半導體晶圓,由於吸附異常不能搬送剩下的半導體晶圓。 C:由於吸附異常不能搬送 5枚半導體晶圓全部。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Using a grinder ("DFG8760" manufactured by Disco Co., Ltd.), it was tried to transfer the five semiconductor wafers obtained above one at a time by suctioning the transfer arm. Then, the transportability of the semiconductor was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. As a result, in this example, the evaluation result was "A". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of transportable semiconductor wafers. The description of "5/5" in the evaluation result column of this item in Table 1 means that 5 semiconductor wafers were evaluated, which means that all 5 semiconductor wafers could be transported without abnormal adsorption. The contents described in this column are the same for the following examples and comparative examples. (evaluation criteria) A: All five semiconductor wafers could be transported without abnormal adsorption. B: 1 to 4 semiconductor wafers could be transferred without abnormal adsorption, but the remaining semiconductor wafers could not be transferred due to abnormal adsorption. C: All five semiconductor wafers could not be transported due to abnormal adsorption.

[分割步驟] 已評價上述彎曲的抑制效果及搬送性的5枚半導體晶圓中,使用1枚,進行以下所示的分割步驟。 即,利用研磨機(Disco社製「DFG8760」),研磨此第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟結束後的半導體晶圓背面。此時,使用粒度360的研磨材進行Z1軸研磨,使用粒度6000的研磨材進行Z2軸研磨,透過以乾拋光進行Z3軸研磨,研磨 上述背面。於是,半導體晶圓厚度成為40μm為止,研磨上述背面,使第1改質層及第2改質層全部消失的同時,隨著此研磨,透過對半導體晶圓施力,在第1改質及第2改質層的部位中,分割半導體晶圓。 根據上述,內部沒有改質層,得到尺寸2mm×2mm,厚度40μm的多數半導體晶片在Backglide膠帶上排列狀態的半導體晶片群。[Split step] Of the five semiconductor wafers whose warpage suppression effect and transportability were evaluated, one was used, and the division procedure shown below was performed. That is, the back surface of the semiconductor wafer after the completion of the first reforming step and the second reforming step was ground using a grinder ("DFG8760" manufactured by Disco Corporation). At this time, Z1-axis grinding is performed with a grinding material with a particle size of 360, Z2-axis grinding is performed with a grinding material with a particle size of 6000, and the above-mentioned back surface is ground by dry polishing for Z3-axis grinding. Then, until the thickness of the semiconductor wafer becomes 40 μm, the above-mentioned back surface is polished to completely disappear the first modified layer and the second modified layer. In the portion of the second modified layer, the semiconductor wafer is divided. According to the above, there was no modified layer inside, and a group of semiconductor wafers was obtained in which a large number of semiconductor wafers with a size of 2 mm x 2 mm and a thickness of 40 μm were arranged on the Backglide tape.

[積層步驟] 其次,利用Multi-wafer mounter(多晶圓貼合機)( Lintec社製「RAD-2510 F/12」),上述得到的半導體晶片群中全部的半導體晶片研磨後的背面(研磨面),黏貼1枚黏晶片(Lintec社製「Adwill LD01D-7 P8AK」)。此黏晶片,包括基材(聚烯烴(polyolefin)製,厚度80μm)以及此基材上形成的膜狀接合劑(厚度7μm),支撐片相當於只以基材形成的黏晶片。在此,此黏晶片中的上述膜狀接合劑黏貼至半導體晶片的背面。藉此,製作上述半導體晶片群以及上述黏晶片的積層物。[Stacking steps] Next, using a Multi-wafer mounter (manufactured by Lintec "RAD-2510 F/12"), the rear surfaces (polished surfaces) of all the semiconductor wafers in the semiconductor wafer group obtained above were ground and pasted. 1 sticky chip ("Adwill LD01D-7 P8AK" manufactured by Lintec). The die-bond includes a substrate (made of polyolefin, thickness 80 μm) and a film-like adhesive (thickness 7 μm) formed on the substrate, and the support sheet is equivalent to a die-bond formed only with the base material. Here, the above-mentioned film-like bonding agent in this wafer bond is adhered to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer. Thereby, a laminate of the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer group and the above-mentioned bonded wafers is produced.

[拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性評價] 其次,從半導體晶片的上述電路形成面除去Backglide tape(膠帶)。 其次,使用拾起.黏晶裝置(Canon Machinery(佳能機械)社製「BESTEM02」),在常溫下,固定上述積層物後,上述積層物與固定此的環狀框架(Ring frame)之間,新產生4mm的高低差。於是,此狀態中,對於上述積層物,透過從這基材側施力頂起,將上述積層物中的上述膜狀接合劑,沿著上述半導體晶片外周切斷,嘗試將背面備置此切斷後的膜狀接合劑的半導體晶片,從上述基材拉開拾起。此時,作為頂起部使用1個突起(接腳),使其頂起高度為0.35mm,頂起速度為20mm/s,頂起保持時間為1秒,頂起上述積層物。[Pick-up procedure, evaluation of pick-up suitability of semiconductor wafer] Next, Backglide tape (adhesive tape) is removed from the said circuit formation surface of a semiconductor wafer. Second, use pick up. Die bonding device ("BESTEM02" manufactured by Canon Machinery Co., Ltd.), after fixing the above-mentioned laminate at room temperature, a height difference of 4mm is newly generated between the above-mentioned laminate and the ring frame (Ring frame) on which it is fixed. . Then, in this state, for the above-mentioned laminate, by pushing up from the base material side, the above-mentioned film-like bonding agent in the above-mentioned laminate is cut along the outer periphery of the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer, and an attempt is made to prepare the back surface after cutting. The semiconductor wafer of the film-like bonding agent is pulled apart from the above-mentioned substrate to pick up. At this time, one protrusion (pin) was used as the jacking portion, and the jacking height was 0.35 mm, the jacking speed was 20 mm/s, and the jacking holding time was 1 second, to jack up the above laminate.

本步驟,在上述1枚半導體晶圓中,連續進行27次。於是,確認尺寸2mm×2mm的目標半導體晶片,作為附膜狀接合劑的半導體晶片,不能拾起的次數(即,拾起不良的次數)。根據此次數,以下列評價基準評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。結果,如表1所示,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。 (評價基準) A:拾起不良的次數是0次。 B:拾起不良的次數是1〜3次。 C:拾起不良的次數是4次以上。This step is continuously performed 27 times on the above-mentioned one semiconductor wafer. Then, the number of times that the target semiconductor wafer with a size of 2 mm×2 mm cannot be picked up as a semiconductor wafer with a film-like bonding agent (that is, the number of times of poor pick-up) was confirmed. Based on this number, the pick-up suitability of the semiconductor wafer was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. As a result, as shown in Table 1, in this example, the evaluation result was "A". (evaluation criteria) A: The number of bad pick-ups is 0. B: The number of times of picking up bad ones is 1 to 3 times. C: The number of times of picking up a defect is 4 or more.

[實施例2] 根據參照第7〜8圖說明的方法(第2實施形態),製造半導體晶片,並拾起。具體而言,如下。[Example 2] According to the method (second embodiment) described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 8, a semiconductor wafer is manufactured and picked up. Specifically, it is as follows.

[第1改質步驟、第2改質步驟] 代替離半導體晶圓的電路形成面85μm深度的位置形成第1改質層,離半導體晶圓的電路形成面75μm深度的位置以及135μm深度的位置形成第1改質層之外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,形成2條線狀第1改質層(第1改質步驟)。 本實施例中,Δ11 的平均值是30μm。[First reforming step, second reforming step] Instead of forming the first reforming layer at a position 85 μm deep from the circuit forming surface of the semiconductor wafer, a position 75 μm deep and a position 135 μm deep from the circuit forming surface of the semiconductor wafer Except for forming the first modified layer, two linear first modified layers were formed by the same method as in the case of Example 1 (first modifying step). In this embodiment, the average value of Δ11 is 30 μm.

又,代替離半導體晶圓的背面85μm深度且第1改質層正上方的位置上形成第2改質層,離半導體晶圓的背面75μm深度且第1改質層正上方的位置以及離半導體晶圓的背面的135μm深度且第1改質層正上方的位置上形成第2改質層之外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,形成2條線狀的第2改質層(第2改質步驟)。此時,半導體晶圓中,比第1改質層更背面側形成第2改質層。 本實施例中,Δ22 的平均值是30μm,Δ12 的平均值是455μm。Also, instead of forming the second modified layer at a depth of 85 μm from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer and directly above the first modified layer, a position 75 μm deep from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer and directly above the first modified layer and a distance from the semiconductor wafer In addition to forming the second modified layer at a depth of 135 μm on the back surface of the wafer and directly above the first modified layer, two linear second modified layers ( 2nd modification step). At this time, the second modified layer is formed on the back side of the first modified layer in the semiconductor wafer. In this embodiment, the average value of Δ22 is 30 μm, and the average value of Δ12 is 455 μm.

這樣,形成互相平行的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層各2條後,又多次重複進行這樣的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層的形成。此時,調節新形成的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層,對已形成的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層成為平行。又, 根據與目前為止相同的方法,新形成對這樣的多數線狀第1改質層以90°的交叉角度交叉之多數線狀第1改質層以及對多數線狀第2改質層以90°的交叉角度交叉之多數線狀第2改質層(以上第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟的重複)。如此,遍及半導體晶圓全區,透過重複形成第1改質層及第2改質層,離半導體晶圓的電路形成面75μm深度的位置以及135μm深度的位置上,分別網目狀形成第1改質層,離半導體晶圓背面75μm深度的位置以及135μm深度的位置上,分別網目狀形成第2改質層。 根據上述,得到已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓。 合計製作已形成這樣的第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。In this way, after forming two parallel first modified layers and two second modified layers each, the formation of the first modified layer and the second modified layer was repeated several times. At this time, the newly formed linear first modified layer and the second modified layer are adjusted to be parallel to the already formed linear first modified layer and the second modified layer. In addition, by the same method as before, the multi-linear first modified layer intersecting the multi-linear first modified layer at an intersection angle of 90° and the multi-linear second modified layer were newly formed. The multi-line second modifying layer intersected at a crossing angle of 90° (repetition of the first modifying step and the second modifying step above). In this way, by repeatedly forming the first modified layer and the second modified layer throughout the entire area of the semiconductor wafer, the first modified layer is formed in a mesh shape at the position at a depth of 75 μm and at a position at a depth of 135 μm from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, respectively. In the modified layer, the second modified layer was formed in a mesh shape at the position at a depth of 75 μm and at a position at a depth of 135 μm from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer. As described above, a semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed was obtained. A total of five semiconductor wafers on which such a first modified layer and a second modified layer were formed were produced.

[半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果確認] 使用上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,確認半導體晶圓的彎曲大小後,如表1所示,未達0.5mm。即,顯著抑制本實施例中已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。 又,本實施例中,使半導體晶圓的背面接觸平面,在上述平面上裝載此半導體晶圓的結果,半導體晶圓外周與其正下方的上述平面之間不允許間隙。[Confirmation of bowing suppression effect of semiconductor wafer] Using the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the warpage of the semiconductor wafers was confirmed by the same method as in Example 1. As shown in Table 1, it was less than 0.5 mm. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed in the present example was significantly suppressed. Also, in this embodiment, the back surface of the semiconductor wafer is brought into contact with the flat surface, and as a result of mounting the semiconductor wafer on the above-mentioned flat surface, no gap is allowed between the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer and the above-mentioned flat surface directly below.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 關於根據上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,評價搬送性。結果,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。此評價結果,與可搬送的半導體晶圓枚數一起顯示在表1。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Regarding the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the transferability was evaluated by the same method as in the case of Example 1. As a result, in this example, the evaluation result was "A". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of semiconductor wafers that can be transported.

[分割步驟、積層步驟] 除了在已評價上述彎曲的抑制效果及搬送性的5枚半導體晶圓中使用1枚之外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,製作內部沒有改質層,尺寸2mm×2mm,厚度40μm的多數半導體晶片在Backglide tape(膠帶)上排列狀態的半導體晶片群(分割步驟),並製作此半導體晶片群與上述黏晶片的積層物(積層步驟)。[division step, layering step] In the same manner as in Example 1, except for using one of the five semiconductor wafers that were evaluated for the effect of suppressing warpage and transportability, an internally unmodified layer was produced, with a size of 2 mm x 2 mm and a thickness of 40 μm. A plurality of semiconductor wafers are arranged on the backglide tape (adhesive tape) of the semiconductor wafer group (dividing step), and a laminate of this semiconductor wafer group and the above-mentioned adhesive wafer is produced (lamination step).

[拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性的評價] 除了使用上述得到的積層物以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,嘗試拾起膜狀接合劑的同時,也拾起尺寸2mm×2mm的目標半導體晶片(拾起步驟), 評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。 結果,如表1所示,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。[Evaluation of pick-up procedure, semiconductor wafer pick-up suitability] Except using the laminate obtained above, by the same method as in Example 1, an attempt was made to pick up a target semiconductor wafer with a size of 2mm x 2mm at the same time as the film bonding agent (pickup step), and the semiconductor wafer was evaluated. Pickup suitability. As a result, as shown in Table 1, in this example, the evaluation result was "A".

[實施例3] 根據參照第9〜10圖說明的方法(第3實施形態),製造半導體晶片,並拾起。具體而言,如下。[Example 3] According to the method (third embodiment) described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 10, a semiconductor wafer is manufactured and picked up. Specifically, it is as follows.

[第1改質步驟、第2改質步驟] 離半導體晶圓的電路形成面85μm深度的位置,代替形成第1改質層,離半導體晶圓的電路形成面75μm深度的位置以及135μm深度的位置上形成第1改質層以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,形成2條線狀第1改質層(第1改質步驟)。 本實施例中,Δ11 的平均值是30μm。[First modifying step, second modifying step] A position at a depth of 85 μm from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, instead of forming the first modification layer, a position at a depth of 75 μm from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer and a position at a depth of 135 μm Except for the positional formation of the first modified layer, two linear first modified layers were formed by the same method as in Example 1 (first modified step). In this embodiment, the average value of Δ11 is 30 μm.

又,代替離半導體晶圓的背面85μm深度且第1改質層正上方的位置形成第2改質層,離半導體晶圓的背面75μm深度且第1改質層正上方的位置形成第2改質層以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,形成1條線狀第2改質層(第2改質步驟)。此時,半導體晶圓中,比第1改質層更背面層,形成第2改質層。 本實施例中,Δ12 的平均值是515μm。Also, instead of forming the second modified layer at a depth of 85 μm from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer and directly above the first modified layer, a second modified layer is formed at a depth of 75 μm from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer and directly above the first modified layer. Except for the modified layer, a linear second modified layer was formed by the same method as in Example 1 (second modified step). At this time, the second modified layer is formed on the back side of the first modified layer in the semiconductor wafer. In this example, the average value of Δ12 is 515 μm.

這樣,形成2條互相平行的線狀第1改質層,形成1條第2改質層後,再多數次重複進行這樣的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層的形成。此時,新形成的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層,調節成對已形成的線狀第1改質層及第2改質層平行。又,根據與目前為止相同的方法,新形成對這樣的多數線狀第1改質層以90°的交叉角度交叉之多數線狀第1改質層以及對多數線狀第2改質層以90°的交叉角度交叉之多數線狀第2改質層(以上,重複第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟)。但是,目前為止,對半導體晶圓的電路形成面平行的方向中,相鄰的線狀第1改質層間的距離與相鄰的線狀第2改質層間的距離,都全部為實施例1時的1/2。這樣,遍及半導體晶圓全區,透過重複進行第1改質層及第2改質層的形成,離半導體晶圓的電路形成面75μm深度的位置以及135μm深度的位置,分別網目狀形成第1改質層,離半導體晶圓背面75μm深度的位置,網目狀形成第2改質層。 根據上述,得到已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓。 合計製作這樣的已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。In this way, two parallel first modified layers are formed, one second modified layer is formed, and the formation of the first modified layer and the second modified layer is repeated several times. At this time, the newly formed linear first modified layer and the second modified layer are adjusted to be parallel to the already formed linear first modified layer and the second modified layer. Also, by the same method as before, the multi-linear first modified layer intersecting the multi-linear first modified layer at an intersection angle of 90° and the multi-linear second modified layer are newly formed. The multi-line second modifying layer intersecting at a crossing angle of 90° (the above, the first modifying step and the second modifying step are repeated). However, so far, in the direction parallel to the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, the distance between adjacent linear first modified layers and the distance between adjacent linear second modified layers are all the same as in Example 1. 1/2 of the time. In this way, by repeating the formation of the first modified layer and the second modified layer throughout the entire area of the semiconductor wafer, the positions at a depth of 75 μm and at a position at a depth of 135 μm from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer are respectively formed in a mesh shape. As for the modified layer, a second modified layer was formed in a mesh shape at a position at a depth of 75 μm from the back surface of the semiconductor wafer. As described above, a semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed was obtained. A total of 5 such semiconductor wafers on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed were fabricated.

[半導體晶圓彎曲的抑制效果確認] 使用上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,確認半導體晶圓的彎曲大小後,如表1所示,未達0.5mm。即,顯著抑制本實施例中已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。 又,本實施例中,也使半導體晶圓背面接觸平面,裝載此半導體晶圓在上述平面上的結果,半導體晶圓外周與其正下方的前上述平面之間不允許間隙。[Confirmation of the effect of suppressing bowing of semiconductor wafers] Using the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the warpage of the semiconductor wafers was confirmed by the same method as in Example 1. As shown in Table 1, it was less than 0.5 mm. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed in the present example was significantly suppressed. Also, in this embodiment, the back surface of the semiconductor wafer is brought into contact with the plane, and as a result of mounting the semiconductor wafer on the plane, no gap is allowed between the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer and the front plane directly below it.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 關於上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,評價搬送性。結果,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。此評價結果,與可以搬送的半導體晶圓枚數一起顯示於表1。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Regarding the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the transferability was evaluated by the same method as in the case of Example 1. As a result, in this example, the evaluation result was "A". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of semiconductor wafers that can be transported.

[分割步驟、積層步驟] 除了在已評價上述彎曲的抑制效果及搬送性的5枚半導體晶圓中使用1枚之外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,製作內部沒有改質層,尺寸1mm×1mm,厚度40μm的多數半導體晶片在Backglide tape(膠帶)上排列狀態的半導體晶片群(分割步驟),並製作此半導體晶片群與上述黏晶片的積層物(積層步驟)。[division step, layering step] In the same manner as in Example 1, except for using one of the five semiconductor wafers that were evaluated for the effect of suppressing warpage and the transferability, an internally unmodified layer was produced, with a size of 1 mm x 1 mm and a thickness of 40 μm. A plurality of semiconductor wafers are arranged on the backglide tape (adhesive tape) of the semiconductor wafer group (dividing step), and a laminate of this semiconductor wafer group and the above-mentioned adhesive wafer is produced (lamination step).

[拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性的評價] 除了使用上述得到的積層物以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,嘗試拾起膜狀接合劑的同時,也拾起尺寸1mm×1mm的目標半導體晶片(拾起步驟), 評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。 結果,如表1所示,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。[Evaluation of pick-up procedure, semiconductor wafer pick-up suitability] Except for using the laminate obtained above, by the same method as in Example 1, an attempt was made to pick up a target semiconductor wafer with a size of 1 mm x 1 mm at the same time as the film bonding agent (pick-up step), and the semiconductor wafer was evaluated. Pickup suitability. As a result, as shown in Table 1, in this example, the evaluation result was "A".

[實施例4] 根據參照第7〜8圖說明的方法(第2實施形態),製造半導體晶片,並拾起。具體而言,如下。[Example 4] According to the method (second embodiment) described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 8, a semiconductor wafer is manufactured and picked up. Specifically, it is as follows.

[第1改質步驟、第2改質步驟] 對半導體晶圓的電路形成面平行的方向中,相鄰的線狀第1改質層間的距離以及相鄰的線狀第2改質層間的距離,全都是1/2之外,利用與實施例2的情況相同的方法,得到已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓。 本實施例中,Δ11 及Δ22 的平均值是30μm,Δ12 的平均值是455μm。 合計製作這樣的已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。[First modification step, second modification step] In the direction parallel to the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, the distance between adjacent linear first modification layers and the distance between adjacent linear second modification layers The distances were all other than 1/2, and by the same method as in Example 2, a semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer had been formed was obtained. In this embodiment, the average value of Δ11 and Δ22 is 30 μm, and the average value of Δ12 is 455 μm. A total of 5 such semiconductor wafers on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed were produced.

[半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果確認] 使用上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,確認半導體晶圓的彎曲大小後,如表1所示,未達0.5mm。即,顯著抑制本實施例中已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。 又,本實施例中,使半導體晶圓的背面接觸平面,在上述平面上裝載此半導體晶圓的結果,半導體晶圓外周與其正下方的上述平面之間不允許間隙。[Confirmation of bowing suppression effect of semiconductor wafer] Using the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the warpage of the semiconductor wafers was confirmed by the same method as in Example 1. As shown in Table 1, it was less than 0.5 mm. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed in the present example was significantly suppressed. Also, in this embodiment, the back surface of the semiconductor wafer is brought into contact with the flat surface, and as a result of mounting the semiconductor wafer on the above-mentioned flat surface, no gap is allowed between the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer and the above-mentioned flat surface directly below.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 關於根據上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,評價搬送性。結果,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。此評價結果,與可以搬送的半導體晶圓的枚數一起顯示在表1。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Regarding the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the transferability was evaluated by the same method as in the case of Example 1. As a result, in this example, the evaluation result was "A". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of semiconductor wafers that can be transported.

[分割步驟、積層步驟] 除了在已評價上述彎曲的抑制效果及搬送性的5枚半導體晶圓中使用1枚之外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,製作內部沒有改質層,尺寸1mm×1mm,厚度40μm的多數半導體晶片在Backglide tape(膠帶)上排列狀態的半導體晶片群(分割步驟),並製作此半導體晶片群與上述黏晶片的積層物(積層步驟)。[division step, layering step] In the same manner as in Example 1, except for using one of the five semiconductor wafers that were evaluated for the effect of suppressing warpage and the transferability, an internally unmodified layer was produced, with a size of 1 mm x 1 mm and a thickness of 40 μm. A plurality of semiconductor wafers are arranged on the backglide tape (adhesive tape) of the semiconductor wafer group (dividing step), and a laminate of this semiconductor wafer group and the above-mentioned adhesive wafer is produced (lamination step).

[拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性的評價] 除了使用上述得到的積層物以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,嘗試拾起膜狀接合劑的同時,也拾起尺寸1mm×1mm的目標半導體晶片(拾起步驟), 評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。 結果,如表1所示,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。[Evaluation of pick-up procedure, semiconductor wafer pick-up suitability] Except for using the laminate obtained above, by the same method as in Example 1, an attempt was made to pick up a target semiconductor wafer with a size of 1 mm x 1 mm at the same time as the film bonding agent (pick-up step), and the semiconductor wafer was evaluated. Pickup suitability. As a result, as shown in Table 1, in this example, the evaluation result was "A".

[實施例5] 根據參照第7〜8圖說明的方法(第2實施形態),製造半導體晶片。具體而言,如下。[Example 5] According to the method (second embodiment) described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 8, a semiconductor wafer is manufactured. Specifically, it is as follows.

[第1改質步驟、第2改質步驟] 對半導體晶圓的電路形成面平行的方向中,相鄰的線狀第1改質層間的距離以及相鄰的線狀第2改質層間的距離,全都是1/4之外,利用與實施例2的情況相同的方法,得到已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓。 本實施例中,Δ11 及Δ22 的平均值是30μm,Δ12 的平均值是455μm。 合計製作這樣的已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。[First modification step, second modification step] In the direction parallel to the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, the distance between adjacent linear first modification layers and the distance between adjacent linear second modification layers The distances were all other than 1/4, and by the same method as in Example 2, a semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer had been formed was obtained. In this embodiment, the average value of Δ11 and Δ22 is 30 μm, and the average value of Δ12 is 455 μm. A total of 5 such semiconductor wafers on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed were fabricated.

[半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果確認] 使用上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,確認半導體晶圓的彎曲大小後,如表1所示,係1mm。即,充分抑制本實施例中已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。 又,本實施例中,使半導體晶圓的背面接觸平面,在上述平面上裝載此半導體晶圓的結果,半導體晶圓外周與其正下方的上述平面之間不允許間隙。[Confirmation of bowing suppression effect of semiconductor wafer] Using the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the curvature of the semiconductor wafer was confirmed by the same method as in Example 1. As shown in Table 1, it was 1 mm. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed in this embodiment was sufficiently suppressed. Also, in this embodiment, the back surface of the semiconductor wafer is brought into contact with the flat surface, and as a result of mounting the semiconductor wafer on the above-mentioned flat surface, no gap is allowed between the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer and the above-mentioned flat surface directly below.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 關於根據上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,評價搬送性。結果,本實施例中,評價結果是「B」。此評價結果,與可以搬送的半導體晶圓的枚數一起顯示在表1。表1中本項目的評價結果欄中「2/5」的記載,意味評價5枚半導體晶圓,不伴隨吸附異常,可以搬送2枚半導體晶圓,由於吸附異常不能搬送3枚半導體晶圓。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Regarding the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the transferability was evaluated by the same method as in the case of Example 1. As a result, in this example, the evaluation result was "B". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of semiconductor wafers that can be transported. The description of "2/5" in the evaluation result column of this item in Table 1 means that 5 semiconductor wafers were evaluated, 2 semiconductor wafers could be transported without adsorption abnormality, and 3 semiconductor wafers could not be transported due to adsorption abnormality.

[分割步驟、積層步驟] 除了在已評價上述彎曲的抑制效果及搬送性的5枚半導體晶圓中使用可搬送的1枚之外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,製作內部沒有改質層,尺寸0.5mm×0.5mm,厚度40μm的多數半導體晶片在Backglide tape(膠帶)上排列狀態的半導體晶片群(分割步驟),並製作此半導體晶片群與上述黏晶片的積層物(積層步驟)。[division step, layering step] Except for using one of the five semiconductor wafers that can be transported out of the five semiconductor wafers that have been evaluated for the effect of suppressing warpage and the transportability, the same method as in Example 1 was used to fabricate an internally unmodified layer with a size of 0.5mm× 0.5mm, 40μm thick semiconductor wafer group in the state of arrangement on Backglide tape (tape) (dividing step), and make a laminate of this semiconductor wafer group and the above-mentioned bonded wafer (lamination step).

[拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性的評價] 除了使用上述得到的積層物以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,嘗試拾起膜狀接合劑的同時,也拾起尺寸0.5mm×0.5mm的目標半導體晶片(拾起步驟), 評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。 結果,如表1所示,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。[Evaluation of pick-up procedure, semiconductor wafer pick-up suitability] Except for using the laminate obtained above, by the same method as in Example 1, an attempt was made to pick up a target semiconductor wafer with a size of 0.5mm×0.5mm at the same time as the film bonding agent (pickup step), and the evaluation Pick-up suitability of semiconductor wafers. As a result, as shown in Table 1, in this example, the evaluation result was "A".

[實施例6] 根據參照第7〜8圖說明的方法(第2實施形態),製造半導體晶片。具體而言,如下。[Example 6] According to the method (second embodiment) described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 8, a semiconductor wafer is manufactured. Specifically, it is as follows.

[第1改質步驟、第2改質步驟] 對半導體晶圓的電路形成面平行的方向中,相鄰的線狀第1改質層間的距離以及相鄰的線狀第2改質層間的距離,全都是3/8之外,利用與實施例2的情況相同的方法,得到已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓。 本實施例中,Δ11 及Δ22 的平均值是30μm,Δ12 的平均值是455μm。 合計製作這樣的已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。[First modification step, second modification step] In the direction parallel to the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, the distance between adjacent linear first modification layers and the distance between adjacent linear second modification layers The distances were all other than 3/8, and by the same method as in Example 2, a semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer had been formed was obtained. In this embodiment, the average value of Δ11 and Δ22 is 30 μm, and the average value of Δ12 is 455 μm. A total of 5 such semiconductor wafers on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed were fabricated.

[半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果確認] 使用上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,確認半導體晶圓的彎曲大小後,如表1所示,未達0.5mm。即,顯著抑制本實施例中已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。 又,本實施例中,使半導體晶圓的背面接觸平面,在上述平面上裝載此半導體晶圓的結果,半導體晶圓外周與其正下方的上述平面之間不允許間隙。[Confirmation of bowing suppression effect of semiconductor wafer] Using the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the warpage of the semiconductor wafers was confirmed by the same method as in Example 1. As shown in Table 1, it was less than 0.5 mm. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed in the present example was significantly suppressed. Also, in this embodiment, the back surface of the semiconductor wafer is brought into contact with the flat surface, and as a result of mounting the semiconductor wafer on the above-mentioned flat surface, no gap is allowed between the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer and the above-mentioned flat surface directly below.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 關於根據上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,評價搬送性。結果,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。此評價結果,與可以搬送的半導體晶圓的枚數一起顯示在表1。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Regarding the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the transferability was evaluated by the same method as in the case of Example 1. As a result, in this example, the evaluation result was "A". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of semiconductor wafers that can be transported.

[分割步驟、積層步驟] 除了在已評價上述彎曲的抑制效果及搬送性的5枚半導體晶圓中使用1枚之外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,製作內部沒有改質層,尺寸0.75mm×0.75mm,厚度40μm的多數半導體晶片在Backglide tape(膠帶)上排列狀態的半導體晶片群(分割步驟),並製作此半導體晶片群與上述黏晶片的積層物(積層步驟)。[division step, layering step] In the same manner as in Example 1, except for using one of the five semiconductor wafers that had been evaluated for the effect of suppressing warpage and transportability, a size of 0.75 mm x 0.75 mm was produced without an internal modified layer. A semiconductor wafer group in which a large number of semiconductor wafers with a thickness of 40 μm are arranged on Backglide tape (separation step), and a laminate of this semiconductor wafer group and the above-mentioned bonded wafers is produced (lamination step).

[拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性的評價] 除了使用上述得到的積層物以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,嘗試拾起膜狀接合劑的同時,也拾起尺寸0.75mm×0.75mm的目標半導體晶片(拾起步驟), 評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。 結果,如表1所示,本實施例中,評價結果是「A」。[Evaluation of pick-up procedure, semiconductor wafer pick-up suitability] Except for using the laminate obtained above, by the same method as in Example 1, an attempt was made to pick up a target semiconductor wafer with a size of 0.75mm×0.75mm at the same time as the film bonding agent (pickup step), and the evaluation Pick-up suitability of semiconductor wafers. As a result, as shown in Table 1, in this example, the evaluation result was "A".

[比較例1] [第1改質步驟] 對半導體晶圓的電路形成面平行的方向中,相鄰的線狀第1改質層間的距離是1/2,以及不形成第2改質層(換言之,不實行第2改質步驟)以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,得到已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓。即,本比較例中,離半導體晶圓的電路形成面85μm深度的位置,網目狀形成第1改質層,其餘一切,不形成改質層。 合計製作這樣的已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。[Comparative example 1] [1st reforming step] In the direction parallel to the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, the distance between adjacent linear first modifying layers is 1/2, and the second modifying layer is not formed (in other words, the second modifying step is not performed) , using the same method as in Example 1, a semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer was formed was obtained. That is, in this comparative example, the first modified layer was formed in a mesh shape at a position at a depth of 85 μm from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, and no modified layer was formed in the rest. A total of five such semiconductor wafers on which the first modified layer was formed were fabricated.

[半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果確認] 使用上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,確認半導體晶圓的彎曲大小後,如表1所示,係1.5mm。即,未抑制本比較例中已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。[Confirmation of bowing suppression effect of semiconductor wafer] Using the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the curvature of the semiconductor wafer was confirmed by the same method as in Example 1. As shown in Table 1, it was 1.5 mm. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer was formed in this comparative example was not suppressed.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 關於根據上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,評價搬送性。結果,本比較例中,評價結果是「C」。此評價結果,與可以搬送的半導體晶圓的枚數一起顯示在表1。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Regarding the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the transferability was evaluated by the same method as in the case of Example 1. As a result, in this comparative example, the evaluation result was "C". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of semiconductor wafers that can be transported.

[分割步驟、積層步驟、拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性的評價] 本比較例中,嘗試尺寸1mm×1mm的半導體晶片的製造,如表1所示, 5枚半導體晶圓全部,由於吸附異常不能搬送。因此,本比較例中,不能進行之後的分割步驟、積層步驟及拾起步驟,不能製造半導體晶片、不能評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。[Segmentation step, lamination step, pick-up step, evaluation of pick-up suitability of semiconductor wafer] In this comparative example, manufacture of a semiconductor wafer with a size of 1 mm×1 mm was attempted, and as shown in Table 1, all five semiconductor wafers could not be transported due to abnormal adsorption. Therefore, in this comparative example, the subsequent dividing step, lamination step, and pick-up step could not be performed, a semiconductor wafer could not be manufactured, and the pick-up suitability of the semiconductor wafer could not be evaluated.

[比較例2] [第1改質步驟] 不形成第2改質層(換言之,不進行第2改質步驟)之外,利用與實施例3的情況相同的方法,得到已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓。即,本比較例中,離半導體晶圓的電路形成面75μm深度的位置以及135μm深度的位置,分別網目狀形成第1改質層,其餘一切不形成改質層。 合計製作這樣的已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。[Comparative example 2] [1st reforming step] A semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer was formed was obtained by the same method as in Example 3 except that the second modified layer was not formed (in other words, the second modified step was not performed). That is, in this comparative example, the first modifying layer was formed in a mesh shape at the positions at a depth of 75 μm and at a position at a depth of 135 μm from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, and no modifying layer was formed at all the rest. A total of five such semiconductor wafers on which the first modified layer was formed were produced.

[半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果確認] 使用上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,確認半導體晶圓的彎曲大小後,如表1所示,係1.5mm。即,未抑制本比較例中已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。[Confirmation of bowing suppression effect of semiconductor wafer] Using the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the curvature of the semiconductor wafer was confirmed by the same method as in Example 1. As shown in Table 1, it was 1.5 mm. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer was formed in this comparative example was not suppressed.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 關於根據上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,評價搬送性。結果,本比較例中,評價結果是「C」。此評價結果,與可搬送的半導體晶圓的枚數一起顯示在表1。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Regarding the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the transferability was evaluated by the same method as in the case of Example 1. As a result, in this comparative example, the evaluation result was "C". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of transportable semiconductor wafers.

[分割步驟、積層步驟、拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性的評價] 本比較例中,嘗試尺寸1mm×1mm的半導體晶片的製造,如表1所示, 5枚半導體晶圓全部,由於吸附異常不能搬送。因此,本比較例中,不能進行之後的分割步驟、積層步驟及拾起步驟,不能製造半導體晶片、不能評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。[Segmentation step, lamination step, pick-up step, evaluation of pick-up suitability of semiconductor wafer] In this comparative example, manufacture of a semiconductor wafer with a size of 1 mm×1 mm was attempted, and as shown in Table 1, all five semiconductor wafers could not be transported due to abnormal adsorption. Therefore, in this comparative example, the subsequent dividing step, lamination step, and pick-up step could not be performed, a semiconductor wafer could not be manufactured, and the pick-up suitability of the semiconductor wafer could not be evaluated.

[比較例3] [第1改質步驟] 對半導體晶圓的電路形成面平行的方向中,相鄰的線狀第1改質層間的距離是3/8,以及不形成第2改質層(換言之,不實行第2改質步驟)以外,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,得到已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓。即,本比較例中,離半導體晶圓的電路形成面85μm深度的位置,網目狀形成第1改質層,其餘一切,不形成改質層。 合計製作這樣的已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓5枚。[Comparative example 3] [1st reforming step] In the direction parallel to the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, the distance between adjacent linear first modifying layers is 3/8, and the second modifying layer is not formed (in other words, the second modifying step is not performed) , using the same method as in Example 1, a semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer was formed was obtained. That is, in this comparative example, the first modified layer was formed in a mesh shape at a position at a depth of 85 μm from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer, and no modified layer was formed in the rest. A total of five such semiconductor wafers on which the first modified layer was formed were fabricated.

[半導體晶圓的彎曲抑制效果確認] 使用上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,確認半導體晶圓的彎曲大小後,如表1所示,係3mm。即,未抑制本比較例中已形成第1改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲。[Confirmation of bowing suppression effect of semiconductor wafer] Using the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the curvature of the semiconductor wafer was confirmed by the same method as in Example 1. As shown in Table 1, it was 3 mm. That is, warping of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer was formed in this comparative example was not suppressed.

[半導體晶圓的搬送性評價] 關於根據上述得到的5枚半導體晶圓,利用與實施例1的情況相同的方法,評價搬送性。結果,本比較例中,評價結果是「C」。此評價結果,與可搬送的半導體晶圓的枚數一起顯示在表1。[Evaluation of transportability of semiconductor wafers] Regarding the five semiconductor wafers obtained above, the transferability was evaluated by the same method as in the case of Example 1. As a result, in this comparative example, the evaluation result was "C". The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 together with the number of transportable semiconductor wafers.

[分割步驟、積層步驟、拾起步驟、半導體晶片的拾起適合性的評價] 本比較例中,嘗試尺寸0.75mm×0.75mm的半導體晶片的製造,如表1所示, 5枚半導體晶圓,由於吸附異常不能搬送。因此,本比較例中,不能進行之後的分割步驟、積層步驟及拾起步驟,不能製造半導體晶片、不能評價半導體晶片的拾起適合性。[Segmentation step, lamination step, pick-up step, evaluation of pick-up suitability of semiconductor wafer] In this comparative example, manufacture of semiconductor wafers with a size of 0.75 mm×0.75 mm was attempted, and as shown in Table 1, five semiconductor wafers could not be transported due to abnormal adsorption. Therefore, in this comparative example, the subsequent dividing step, lamination step, and pick-up step could not be performed, a semiconductor wafer could not be manufactured, and the pick-up suitability of the semiconductor wafer could not be evaluated.

[表1] *1 進行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時半導體晶圓的厚度。*2 能進行分割步驟時,實際上得到的半導體晶片的尺寸,不能進行分割步驟時,預定的半導體晶片的尺寸。[Table 1] *1 Thickness of the semiconductor wafer when the 1st modification step and the 2nd modification step are performed. *2 The size of the actually obtained semiconductor wafer when the dividing step can be performed, and the expected size of the semiconductor wafer when the dividing step cannot be performed.

根據上述結果很清楚地,實施例1〜6中,已形成第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓彎曲尺寸在1mm以下,抑制上述半導體晶圓的彎曲。結果,這些實施例中,上述半導體晶圓的搬送性良好。尤其,實施例1〜4及6中,上述半導體晶圓的彎曲尺寸未達0.5mm,彎曲的抑制效果顯著地高,半導體晶圓的搬送性特別優異。因為,實施例1〜4及6中,相對於半導體晶片最短的一邊長0.75mm以上(0.75〜2mm),已形成第1改質層及第2改質的半導體晶圓厚度為0.725mm,半導體晶片最短的一邊長是比上述厚度大的值。實施例5中,相對於半導體晶片的最短一邊長是0.5mm,已形成第1改質層及第2改質的半導體晶圓厚度為0.725mm,半導體晶片最短的一邊長是比上述厚度小的值。由於此不同點,與其它實施例的情況,效果程度有差異。As is clear from the above results, in Examples 1 to 6, the semiconductor wafer on which the first modified layer and the second modified layer were formed had a bending dimension of 1 mm or less, and the bending of the semiconductor wafer was suppressed. As a result, in these Examples, the transferability of the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer was good. In particular, in Examples 1 to 4 and 6, the bending dimension of the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer was less than 0.5 mm, the effect of suppressing the bending was remarkably high, and the transportability of the semiconductor wafer was particularly excellent. Because, in Examples 1 to 4 and 6, the shortest side of the semiconductor wafer is longer than 0.75 mm (0.75 to 2 mm), and the thickness of the first modified layer and the second modified semiconductor wafer is 0.725 mm. The length of the shortest side of the wafer is a value larger than the aforementioned thickness. In Example 5, the length of the shortest side of the semiconductor wafer is 0.5 mm, the thickness of the semiconductor wafer on which the first modification layer and the second modification have been formed is 0.725 mm, and the length of the shortest side of the semiconductor wafer is smaller than the above-mentioned thickness. value. Due to this difference, there is a difference in the degree of effect from the case of other embodiments.

反映此彎曲的抑制效果,實施例1〜6中,密合可搬送之已形成的第1改質層及第2改質層的半導體晶圓至專用工作台,因為可確實固定, 可研磨其背面,可以良好進行分割步驟。 又,這些實施例中,之後的積層步驟及拾起步驟也可以良好進行,半導體晶片的適合性優異。Reflecting the effect of suppressing warpage, in Examples 1 to 6, the semiconductor wafers with the formed first modified layer and the second modified layer can be bonded and transported to a dedicated table, and since they can be firmly fixed, they can be ground. On the back, the segmentation step can be performed well. Also, in these Examples, the subsequent lamination step and pick-up step can be performed well, and the suitability for semiconductor wafers is excellent.

這樣,實施例1〜6中,經由半導體晶圓內部中的改質層形成,即使製造尺寸小的半導體晶片時,也可以抑制半導體晶圓的彎曲發生。結果,拾起直到拾起附膜狀接合劑的半導體晶片為止的步驟,可以沒問題地進行。In this way, in Examples 1 to 6, through the formation of the modified layer inside the semiconductor wafer, even when a small-sized semiconductor wafer is produced, the occurrence of bowing of the semiconductor wafer can be suppressed. As a result, the steps from picking up to picking up the semiconductor wafer with the film-like bonding agent can be performed without any problem.

相對於此,比較例1〜3中,因為不形成第2改質層的習知方法,已形成改質層(換言之,只有第1改質層)的半導體晶圓的彎曲尺寸在1.5mm以上,未抑制上述半導體晶圓的彎曲。結果,這些比較例中,不能搬送上述半導體晶圓,不能進行之後的分割步驟、積層步驟以及拾起步驟。On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 1 to 3, since the conventional method of not forming the second modified layer, the bending dimension of the semiconductor wafer on which the modified layer was formed (in other words, only the first modified layer) was 1.5 mm or more , did not suppress the bending of the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer. As a result, in these comparative examples, the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer could not be transported, and the subsequent dividing step, stacking step, and pick-up step could not be performed.

這樣,比較例1〜3中,經由半導體晶圓內部中改質層的形成,製造尺寸小的半導體晶片時,不能抑制半導體晶圓彎曲的發生。結果,不能製造附膜狀接合劑的半導體晶片。 [產業上的利用可能性]Thus, in Comparative Examples 1 to 3, when a small-sized semiconductor wafer was produced through the formation of the reforming layer inside the semiconductor wafer, the occurrence of bowing of the semiconductor wafer could not be suppressed. As a result, a semiconductor wafer with a film-like bonding agent cannot be manufactured. [industrial availability]

本發明可利用於半導體晶片及半導體裝置的製造。The present invention can be utilized in the manufacture of semiconductor wafers and semiconductor devices.

6:研磨手段; 7:保護膜; 8:半導體晶圓; 8a:半導體晶圓的電路形成面; 8b:半導體晶圓的背面; 8’:半導體晶片; 8a’:電路形成面; 8A’:半導體晶片群; 9:半導體晶圓; 9a:電路形成面; 9b:背面; 10:支撐片; 11:基材; 12:黏合劑層; 13:膜狀接合劑; 13’:切斷後的膜狀接合劑; 51:突起; 52:真空夾頭; 80’:半導體晶片的外周; 80a:半導體晶圓內部的第1區域; 80b:半導體晶圓內部的第2區域; 81:第1改質層; 82:第2改質層; 83:第1改質層; 84:第2改質層; 89:龜裂; 91:改質層; 101:黏晶片; 801:半導體晶片群與黏晶片的積層物; 811:第1改質層; 812:第1改質層; 821:第2改質層; 822:第2改質層; 831:第1改質層; 832:第1改質層; 841:第2改質層; 842:第2改質層; D1:第1區域80a的深度; D2:第2區域80b的深度; P1:突出方向; P2:拉起方向; R1:雷射光; R2:雷射光; S8’:半導體晶片的一邊長(半導體晶片的最短一邊長) ;以及 T8:實行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓厚度。6: grinding means; 7: protective film; 8: semiconductor wafer; 8a: circuit formation surface of semiconductor wafer; 8b: backside of semiconductor wafer; 8': semiconductor wafer; 8a': circuit formation surface; 8A': Semiconductor wafer group; 9: semiconductor wafer; 9a: circuit formation surface; 9b: back surface; 10: support sheet; 11: base material; 12: adhesive layer; 13: film bonding agent; 13': film after cutting 51: protrusion; 52: vacuum chuck; 80': the outer periphery of the semiconductor wafer; 80a: the first area inside the semiconductor wafer; 80b: the second area inside the semiconductor wafer; 81: the first modification layer; 82: the second modified layer; 83: the first modified layer; 84: the second modified layer; 89: cracks; 91: modified layer; 101: bonded chip; 801: semiconductor chip group and bonded chip 811: the first modified layer; 812: the first modified layer; 821: the second modified layer; 822: the second modified layer; 831: the first modified layer; 832: the first modified layer layer; 841: the second modified layer; 842: the second modified layer; D 1 : the depth of the 1st region 80a; D 2 : the depth of the 2nd region 80b; P 1 : the protruding direction; P 2 : the pulling direction ; R 1 : laser light; R 2 : laser light; S 8 ': the length of one side of the semiconductor wafer (the length of the shortest side of the semiconductor wafer); and T 8 : the semiconductor when implementing the first modification step and the second modification step wafer thickness.

[第1圖]係概略顯示形成改質層的習知半導體晶圓的立體圖; [第2圖]係概略顯示由於改質層的形成產生彎曲狀態的習知半導體晶圓的放大剖面圖; [第3圖]係用以概略說明本發明的第1實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之放大剖面圖; [第4圖]係用以概略說明本發明的第1實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的分割步驟之放大剖面圖; [第5圖]係對應第3圖的立體圖; [第6圖]係對應第4圖的立體圖; [第7圖]係用以概略說明本發明的第2實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之放大剖面圖; [第8圖]係用以概略說明本發明的第2實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的分割步驟之放大剖面圖; [第9圖]係用以概略說明本發明的第3實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之放大剖面圖; [第10圖]係用以概略說明本發明的第3實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的分割步驟之放大剖面圖; [第11圖]係用以概略說明本發明的第4實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之放大剖面圖; [第12圖]係用以概略說明本發明的第4實施形態的半導體晶片在製造方法中的分割步驟之放大剖面圖;以及 [第13圖]係用以概略說明本發明的一實施形態的半導體裝置的製造方法中的積層步驟及拾起步驟之放大剖面圖。[Fig. 1] is a perspective view schematically showing a conventional semiconductor wafer on which a modified layer is formed; [Fig. 2] is an enlarged cross-sectional view schematically showing a conventional semiconductor wafer in a bent state due to the formation of a modified layer; [Fig. 3] is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically illustrating the first modifying step and the second modifying step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the first embodiment of the present invention; [FIG. 4] is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically explaining the dividing steps in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the first embodiment of the present invention; [Figure 5] is a perspective view corresponding to Figure 3; [Figure 6] is a perspective view corresponding to Figure 4; [FIG. 7] is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically illustrating the first modifying step and the second modifying step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the second embodiment of the present invention; [FIG. 8] is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically illustrating the division steps in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the second embodiment of the present invention; [FIG. 9] is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically illustrating the first modifying step and the second modifying step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the third embodiment of the present invention; [FIG. 10] is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically illustrating the dividing step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the third embodiment of the present invention; [Fig. 11] is an enlarged cross-sectional view for schematically illustrating the first modifying step and the second modifying step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention; [FIG. 12] is an enlarged cross-sectional view schematically illustrating the division step in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor wafer according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention; and [FIG. 13] is an enlarged cross-sectional view schematically illustrating a build-up step and a pick-up step in a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

7:保護膜 7: Protective film

8:半導體晶圓 8: Semiconductor wafer

8a:半導體晶圓的電路形成面 8a: Circuit formation surface of semiconductor wafer

8b:半導體晶圓的背面 8b: Backside of semiconductor wafer

80a:半導體晶圓內部的第1區域 80a: the first region inside the semiconductor wafer

80b:半導體晶圓內部的第2區域 80b: The second area inside the semiconductor wafer

81:第1改質層 81: The first modified layer

82:第2改質層 82: The second modified layer

83:第1改質層 83: The first modified layer

84:第2改質層 84: The second modification layer

D1:第1區域80a的深度 D 1 : Depth of the first area 80a

D2:第2區域80b的深度 D 2 : the depth of the second area 80b

R1:雷射光 R 1 : laser light

R2:雷射光 R 2 : laser light

T8:實行第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的半導體晶圓厚度 T 8 : Thickness of the semiconductor wafer when implementing the first modification step and the second modification step

Δ12:在半導體晶圓8的厚度T8方向中第1改質層81的上端與第2改質層82的下端之間的距離 Δ12 : the distance between the upper end of the first modified layer 81 and the lower end of the second modified layer 82 in the thickness T8 direction of the semiconductor wafer 8

Claims (2)

一種半導體晶片的製造方法,包括:第1改質步驟,藉由從半導體晶圓的背面側對上述半導體晶圓照射雷射光,半導體晶圓的內部之中,從上述半導體晶圓的電路形成面到215μm(微米)深度的第1區域中,形成第1改質層;第2改質步驟,藉由從上述背面側對上述半導體晶圓照射雷射光,上述半導體晶圓的內部之中,從上述背面到215μm(微米)深度的第2區域中,而且比上述第1改質層更上述背面側之處,形成第2改質層,其中相對於進行上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟時的上述半導體晶圓厚度,使上述半導體晶片最短的一邊長為相等以上;以及分割步驟,實行上述第1改質步驟及第2改質步驟之後,研磨上述半導體晶圓的上述背面的同時,伴隨此研磨,由於對上述半導體晶圓施加的力,透過在上述第1改質層及第2改質層的部位分割上述半導體晶圓,得到半導體晶片。 A method of manufacturing a semiconductor wafer, comprising: a first modifying step, by irradiating the semiconductor wafer with laser light from the back side of the semiconductor wafer, in the inside of the semiconductor wafer, from the circuit formation surface of the semiconductor wafer In the first region with a depth of 215 μm (micrometer), a first modification layer is formed; in the second modification step, by irradiating laser light on the semiconductor wafer from the back side, the inside of the semiconductor wafer is In the second region from the back surface to a depth of 215 μm (micrometer), and further to the back side than the first modified layer, a second modified layer is formed, wherein compared with the first modified step and the second modified The thickness of the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer during the modification step is such that the length of the shortest side of the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer is equal to or more; Simultaneously, with this polishing, the semiconductor wafer is obtained by dividing the semiconductor wafer at the positions of the first modified layer and the second modified layer due to the force applied to the semiconductor wafer. 一種半導體裝置的製造方法,根據申請專利範圍第1項所述的半導體晶片的製造方法,得到複數個半導體晶片排列狀態的半導體晶片群後,包括:積層步驟,使用包括支撐片以及上述支撐片上形成的膜狀接合劑之黏晶片,將上述黏晶片中的上述膜狀接合劑,透過黏貼至上述半導體晶片群中的半導體晶片研磨後的上述背面,製作上述半導體晶片群與上述黏晶片的積層物;以及拾起步驟,對於上述積層物,透過從其支撐片側施力,將上述積層物中的上述膜狀接合劑,沿著上述半導體晶片切斷,從上述支撐片拉開並拾起背面備置切斷後的上述膜狀接合劑之上述半導體晶片。 A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device. According to the method for manufacturing a semiconductor wafer described in item 1 of the patent scope of the application, after obtaining a semiconductor wafer group in which a plurality of semiconductor wafers are arranged, it includes: a layering step, using a support sheet and forming a chip on the support sheet. The above-mentioned film-like bonding agent in the above-mentioned bonding chip is pasted to the above-mentioned back surface of the semiconductor wafer in the above-mentioned semiconductor chip group after grinding, and a laminate of the above-mentioned semiconductor chip group and the above-mentioned bonding chip is produced. and a pick-up step, for the above-mentioned laminate, by applying force from the side of the support sheet, the above-mentioned film-like adhesive in the above-mentioned laminate is cut along the above-mentioned semiconductor wafer, pulled away from the above-mentioned support sheet and picked up on the back side for preparation The above-mentioned semiconductor wafer of the above-mentioned film bonding agent after cutting.
TW108121952A 2018-06-29 2019-06-24 Manufacturing method of semiconductor chip and manufacturing method of semiconductor device TWI809132B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018124158 2018-06-29
JP2018-124158 2018-06-29

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202017020A TW202017020A (en) 2020-05-01
TWI809132B true TWI809132B (en) 2023-07-21

Family

ID=68987103

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW108121952A TWI809132B (en) 2018-06-29 2019-06-24 Manufacturing method of semiconductor chip and manufacturing method of semiconductor device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2020004210A1 (en)
TW (1) TWI809132B (en)
WO (1) WO2020004210A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2022182693A (en) * 2021-05-28 2022-12-08 浜松ホトニクス株式会社 Laser processing device and laser processing method
TWI810132B (en) * 2023-01-04 2023-07-21 鴻揚半導體股份有限公司 Wafer backside grinding method

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014099522A (en) * 2012-11-15 2014-05-29 Disco Abrasive Syst Ltd Processing method of tabular object
JP2015218287A (en) * 2014-05-19 2015-12-07 古河電気工業株式会社 Adhesive film-integrated surface protection tape for use in grinding thin film, and method for manufacturing semiconductor chip
US20160071767A1 (en) * 2014-09-08 2016-03-10 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Method for manufacturing semiconductor chip and circuit board and electronic apparatus including semiconductor chip
US9543256B2 (en) * 2002-03-12 2017-01-10 Hamamatsu Photonics K.K. Substrate dividing method
TW201816866A (en) * 2016-10-03 2018-05-01 日東電工股份有限公司 Dicing tape integrated adhesive sheet capable of firmly fixing a semiconductor wafer during stealth dicing and capable of easily peeling a semiconductor chip during pickup

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8198176B2 (en) * 2007-10-09 2012-06-12 Hitachi Chemical Company, Ltd. Method for producing semiconductor chip with adhesive film, adhesive film for semiconductor used in the method, and method for producing semiconductor device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9543256B2 (en) * 2002-03-12 2017-01-10 Hamamatsu Photonics K.K. Substrate dividing method
JP2014099522A (en) * 2012-11-15 2014-05-29 Disco Abrasive Syst Ltd Processing method of tabular object
JP2015218287A (en) * 2014-05-19 2015-12-07 古河電気工業株式会社 Adhesive film-integrated surface protection tape for use in grinding thin film, and method for manufacturing semiconductor chip
US20160071767A1 (en) * 2014-09-08 2016-03-10 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Method for manufacturing semiconductor chip and circuit board and electronic apparatus including semiconductor chip
TW201816866A (en) * 2016-10-03 2018-05-01 日東電工股份有限公司 Dicing tape integrated adhesive sheet capable of firmly fixing a semiconductor wafer during stealth dicing and capable of easily peeling a semiconductor chip during pickup

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2020004210A1 (en) 2020-01-02
TW202017020A (en) 2020-05-01
JPWO2020004210A1 (en) 2021-07-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI809051B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method of manufacturing semiconductor chip having protective film
JP2019009203A (en) Dicing die-bonding film
JP6885966B2 (en) Manufacturing method of dicing die bonding sheet and semiconductor chip
JP2021050338A (en) Film adhesive, semiconductor processing sheet, and method for manufacturing semiconductor apparatus
JP2018123253A (en) Film-like adhesive, sheet for semiconductor processing, and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
KR20200108785A (en) Dicing tape with adhesive film
TWI809132B (en) Manufacturing method of semiconductor chip and manufacturing method of semiconductor device
TWI757269B (en) Film-type adhesive composte sheet and method for producing semiconductor device
WO2021193935A1 (en) Sheet for production of semiconductor device and method for producing semiconductor chip with film-form adhesive
TWI758445B (en) Film-type adhesive composite sheet and method for producing semiconductor device
JP7141566B2 (en) Method for manufacturing semiconductor chip with die bonding sheet and film adhesive
JP6998154B2 (en) Die bonding sheet
JP7141567B2 (en) Method for manufacturing semiconductor chip with die bonding sheet and film adhesive
WO2023145610A1 (en) Curable resin film, composite sheet, semiconductor chip, and semiconductor chip manufacturing method
JP7114013B1 (en) Adhesive sheet for fixing jig, composite sheet for forming protective film, and method for manufacturing chip with protective film
TW202145323A (en) Sheet for manufacturing semiconductor device, and method to manufacture the sheet for manufacturing semiconductor device by sequentially laminating the first adhesive layer, the film-like adhesive, the release film, the second adhesive layer, and the support substrate on a substrate
TW202348757A (en) Protective film-forming film, composite sheet for forming protective film, method of manufacturing semiconductor device, and use of protective film-forming film providing a protective film-forming composite sheet including a support sheet and the protective film-forming film provided on one surface of the support sheet
TW202308850A (en) Protective film forming film, protective film forming composite sheet, manufacturing method of workpiece with protective film, and manufacturing method of processed object of workpiece with protective film for the damage/scratches on the surface of the protective film after thermal curing to become less noticeable
KR20230116659A (en) Curable resin film, composite sheet, semiconductor chip, and method for manufacturing semiconductor chip
TW202337688A (en) Composite sheet and kit for forming resin film, and method for manufacturing work-piece with resin film capable of suppressing peeling of the work-piece with a resin film from the adhesive layer
KR20230116660A (en) Curable resin film, composite sheet, semiconductor chip, and method for manufacturing semiconductor chip
JP2013062445A (en) Dicing-die bonding sheet